Upload
others
View
4
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
© KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-06-01 / DO_DBlatt4k_GB.doc
MPK 4000
System documentation
2 06-06-01
Contents Version Chapter
Instruction 05-03-16 I / 1 ...
Event log entries 06-05-22 I – A / 1 ...
Operation status 06-05-22 I – B / 1 ...
Function list 04-10-29 II / 1 ...
MPK 4000 / List of functions LIFT4K 4.00 II – C / 1 ...
Technical description 06-04-28 III / 1 ...
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC) 06-04-28 IV / 1 ...
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS) 05-06-27 V / 1 ...
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH KOLLMORGEN (UK) Ltd.
Broichstrasse 32 Unit 17, St. Asaph Business Park
D-51109 Cologne St. Asaph, Denbighshire LL17OLJ
Phone: +49 (0) 221 89 85 0 United Kingdom
Fax: +49 (0) 221 89 85 30 Phone: 0044-1745-585558
http://www.kollmorgen.de Fax: 0044-1745-585828
E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]
© KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 05-03-16 / DO_AN4DHK_GB.doc
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction
Contents
1 Users guide to the display and menu structure ............................................................ 3 1.1 Function of the push buttons and menu structure..................................................................3 1.2 Structure of the Kollmorgen-Menu ...........................................................................................3 1.3 Defining the location indicator in the fl. modules ETGM24 / ETGB004 (MPK 400/4000) ......4 1.4 Access Management ..................................................................................................................6 1.5 Input-field for test calls ..............................................................................................................7 1.6 Free programmable terminals (BST / Net)................................................................................7
1.6.1 MPK 40/4000 (BST) ..............................................................................................................7 1.6.2 MPK 400 (BST) .....................................................................................................................8 1.6.3 MPK 400/4000 (Net)..............................................................................................................9 1.6.4 MPK 40 (Net).........................................................................................................................9 1.6.5 Identification of the module-terminals ETGB 004 (MPK 400 / 4000) in the menu................10
2 LED – indicators on the front panel .............................................................................. 11 3 Help by faults................................................................................................................... 12
3.1 Function <<Event log>>...........................................................................................................12 3.2 Function <<Operational status>> ...........................................................................................12 3.3 Function <<Test module>>......................................................................................................13
3.3.1 Address-set-up BST-inputs .................................................................................................15 3.3.2 Address-set-up BST-outputs ...............................................................................................17 3.3.3 MPK 400: Address-set-up extension modules.....................................................................18 3.3.4 MPK 400/4000: Address-set-up FKI with IM40 -01 / -03 / -10 / -11 / -12.............................19 3.3.5 MPK 400: Address-set-up FKP ...........................................................................................20 3.3.6 MPK 40: A.-set-up of the modules: FKF40 with IM 40 -01 / -03 / -10 / -11 / -12, WFA 40 ...21
3.4 Function <<Group members>> ...............................................................................................22 3.5 Function <<Module list>> ........................................................................................................22
4 Menu <<Testing / Maintenance>> (MPK 40 / 400) ........................................................ 23 4.1 Menu structure and presettings..............................................................................................23 4.2 Overview of the testing travels ...............................................................................................24 4.3 Function <<Start-, journey-, braking time monitor>>............................................................25 4.4 Function <<Reset travel monitor error>> ...............................................................................25 4.5 Function <<Speed monitoring>> ............................................................................................25 4.6 Function <<Door control>> .....................................................................................................25 4.7 Function <<Set call>> ..............................................................................................................25
I / 2 05-03-16
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
1 Users guide to the display and menu structure 1.1 Function of the push buttons and menu structure
User guide of the display
Description of the 4 symbols:
R
: UP/Down- push buttons are active.
: Plus/Minus- push buttons are active.
: Further submenus can be selected by means of the OK- push button.
: RESET- push button must be operated before further entries are made.
Function of the push buttons
Mainmenu
FunctionESC
OKESC
OK
+
-
ESC
OK
OK
ESCnew value
saved
new valuenot saved
Back
to th
e no
rmal
dis
play
MainmenuSubmenuFunctionValue
Structureof the menu
in the display
The following chart shows,by a symbol in the top rightcorner, which of thebuttons are currentlyactive.
R
Submenu
Attention!: The character "R" in the display shows you, that a parameter into the basic settings was changed!
1.2 Structure of the Kollmorgen-Menu
Operation statusEvent log
Parameter print
Information
Test module
BST-res. outp. term.BST-res. input term.Net-terminals-set-upModule listParking zone planAPS-Diagnostics
BST-res. terminals
DSK-DiagnosticsDCP-DiagnosticsGroup membersNetwork-Diagnostics
Transponder/Reader
Code-No.
User log onUser log offUser identityEditAutomatic user log off
Basic settings
LiftMPK-control
See / give calls
OK for call at bottom floorOK for call at top floor
Floor 1 - 56Simulated call prog.
Settings
Doors in generalDoors side ...
Indicate / gong
Special-tavels
Call operationParkingSafety circuitSimple shaft encoder
Control functions
Vertical selectorDigital selector
Horizontal selector
HydraulicVariable freq. AC
Absolut. pos. system
Travel monitor
Releveling
AC - unregulatedHydr. variable freq.Regulator
Pawl deviceDoor blocking
Remote monitoring
Autom. function test
Transponder / Reader
Net installation
Settings (continu.)
Group
Load measurementTrip counterRunning time counterLift- / control-no.Date / timeVerion no.
Load measurementTraffic pattern
Testing/Maintenance
Presetting
Completion
Notice: The structure contains all menu functions of MPK40/400/4000. It is possible that not all menu functions are available at your
control-system, because the menu is depended on the parameters in the basic-settings and on the MPK-type!
05-03-16 I / 3
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction
1.3 Defining the location indicator in the fl. modules ETGM24 / ETGB004 (MPK 400/4000)
A location indicator must be stored in each module in order to ensure that each module in the network can be clearly identified. The FKF, IRP and IKL modules are fitted with a pre-set location indicator and are automatically recognised and activated by the BST. The ETG M24 / ETG B004 modules do not contain a pre-set location indicator. This means that you will have to define this location indicator using <<Floor commission>> either when commissioning for the first time or when replacing the component.
1. If all external calls associated with a floor and door side are connected with the lift network via a separate ETG M24 / ETG B004 module, the following steps need to be performed:
Settings
Net installation
Floor commission
YES
Set <<Floor commission>> to <<YES>>.
Issue an internal call to the floor where you would like to define the location indicator of the ETG module.
The car travels to the floor requested by the internal call.
Issue an internal call to the floor where the car is now located.
The acknowledgement light for the internal call begins to flash.
Issue an external call from the floor where the car is now located.
The acknowledgement light for the external call begins to flash.
Now press the internal call button which is flashing. You are now defining the location indicator of the ETG module.
The acknowledgement lights for both the internal and external calls go out.
If the door control system is selective at the floor in question, repeat steps 3 - 5 for the other doorside.
Perform steps 2 - 6 for each floor.
Settings
Net installation
Floor commission
NO
Set <<Floor commission>> to <<NO>>.
If, after performing step 4, the acknowledgement light for the external call does not flash, an external call to a different floor may already have been issued. To cancel the procedure, issue a car call to any floor (except the one which is flashing!). Then start again from step 3.
I / 4 05-03-16
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
2. In addition to the relationship between modules and external calls associated with a floor as described under item 1, the following constellations are possible:
• External calls associated with several floors / door sides (in the case of selectivity) are connected to the network via one ETG M24 module.
• The ETG M24 module is used for control without external call functionality.
In these cases, the module is furnished with a location indicator by Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH prior to delivery, eliminating the need for adjustment at the customer's premises. Should such a module need to be replaced subsequently, please specify the control number when ordering the spare part. The spare module will contain a matching location indicator. Please contact our customer service department if a defective module needs to be replaced by one without a location indicator.
Further information on the above type of modules are given in the technical description of the MPK 40/400/4000 unit and in the circuit diagrams.
You delete the location indicator of ETG M24 / ETG B004 –modules with the following steps:
1. turn off the power supply of the module
2. press the micro push button on the module and hold it
3. turn on the power supply
4. relax the micro push button after 3 secounds.
05-03-16 I / 5
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction
1.4 Access Management
To protect the control data and settings from unauthorised access entry to the menus can be limited to those with authority by using a six-digit code. Overall there are seven user levels, levels 1 - 6 being open to user coded access. Each higher level has more access rights made available. In the default settings levels 1 - 6 have no access limitations applied. The 7th level is reserved for the control manufacturer.
The following codes are preset:
Level User Code no. Access rights
7 MPK engineer ** ** ** 6 Service office 11 22 335 Remote interrogation 70 80 904 Service engineer 2 40 50 603 Service engineer 1 10 20 302 Technical engineer 2 01 02 03
1 Technical engineer 1 00 00 00
You can change the preset codes (level 1-6) at the menu <<Code - No. / edit>>!
Examp.: User log on <<Service office>> Examp.: Access blocked for <<Technical engineer 1>> to main menu <<Basic settings>>
Code - No.user log onService - office
Code - No. confirmedHelloService - officeuser loged in
Code - No.Service - office1. Code - No. please11
+_
+ -
Code - No.Service - office2. Code - No. please* * 22
+_
+ -
Code - No.Service - office3. Code - No. please* * * * 33
+_
+ -
OK
OK
OK
OK
Basic settings
Basic settings
Technical engineer 1Yes
+_
Basic settings
Technical engineer 1No
+_
Basic settings
OK
-
+
-
Code - No.User log off
Don´t forget it!
1
1 Push this buttons at the same time
Single menu points as well as entire menu trees with their sub-menus (i.e. the <<Basic settings>> menu) can be blocked in this way. The exceptions to this rule are the menus <<Code - No.>>, <<User Log On>>, <<User log off>> and <<User Identity>>.
I / 6 05-03-16
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
1.5 Input-field for test calls
You find the input-field for test calls under <<See / Give calls / Floor 1 - …>>.
Calls doorside 1 and 2 (2. doorside only by
selective doors)
actual level and travel direction
calls fl.: 1 - 7door 1:
2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7door 2:
+-
I
I + -
1.2.
I
OK
3.
Select call type
Handling: 1.: select call type 2.: set target floor 3.: set call
Call type symbols: : Landing call down; : Landing call up; I: Car call; V: Priority call
1.6 Free programmable terminals (BST / Net)
All free programmable functions can be linked with any of the free programmable inputs and outputs of the BST and the modules (SLON / GLON) with the aid of this menu.
1.6.1 MPK 40/4000 (BST)
Basic settings
Fan Push Button
BST - Input
Input Terminal: E7 + -
OK
1.2.
3.
OK
4.
ESC5.
Handling: 1.: select function 2.: go to 4. menuline 3.: select terminal 4.: save connection 5.: return to 3. menuline
Basic settings Basic settings
MPK- control MPK- control
BST- Input BST- Output
Step “5“ is necessary, if you want more new connections. Push the RESET-push button, if all settings are finished.
05-03-16 I / 7
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction
1.6.2 MPK 400 (BST)
BST - Input
BST IO E7
Fan Push Button
+ -3.
OK
6.
ESC7.
1.
OK
2.
4.+ -
5.
Fl.: Door:+ - + -! !
Handling: 1.: select function 2.: goto 3. menuline 3.: select BST or extension module (A10 - A17) 4./5.: select terminal 6.: save connection 7.: return to 2. menuline ! : this setting is depended on the function in the 2. menuline
Basic settings Basic settings Basic settings
MPK- control MPK- control MPK- control
BST- Input BST- Output BST- calls
Step “7“ is necessary, if you want more new connections. Push the RESET-push button, if all settings are finished.
BST - Functionset
Fl. 1 to 6
Extern. Gong
+ -3.
OK
5.
ESC6.
1.
OK
2.
4.+ -3.
A12 IO 1 - 6+ -3.
4.
Handling: 1.: select function 2.: goto 3. menuline 3.: set values / extension module-N0. 4.: select position 5.: save connection 6.: return to 2. menuline Notice: A12 = Extension module-No. 2
Basic settings
MPK- control
BST- function set
Step “6“ is necessary, if you want more new connections. Push the RESET-push button, if all settings are finished.
I / 8 05-03-16
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
1.6.3 MPK 400/4000 (Net)
Net - Input
FKF 1_0_00
Fan Push Button
Grp.:*
IO 4 (C)+ - + -
Fl.: Door:
ESCOK
+ - + - + -
OK
1.2.
3.
4.
! ! !
5.6.
7.
Handling: 1.: select function 2.: goto 3. menuline 3.: select module 4.: goto 4. menuline (Grp. No., floor, doorside) ! : this setting is depended on the function in the 2. menuline 5.: select terminal 6.: save connection 7.: return to 2. menuline
Basic settings Basic settings
MPK- control MPK- control
Net- input Net- output
Step “7“ is necessary, if you want more new connections. Push the RESET-push button, if all settings are finished.
1.6.4 MPK 40 (Net)
Net - Input
FKF ID: 1
Fan Push Button
E 1 (I) + -
Fl.: Door:
ESCOK
+ - + -
OK
1.2.
4.
! !
5.6.
7.
Handling: 1.: select function 2.: goto 3. menuline 3.: select module 4.: goto 4. menuline (floor, doorside) ! : this setting is depended on the function in the 2. menuline 5.: select terminal 6.: save connection 7.: return to 2. menuline
Basic settings Basic settings
MPK- control MPK- control
Net- input Net- output
Step “7“ is necessary, if you want more new connections. Push the RESET-push button, if all settings are finished.
05-03-16 I / 9
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction
1.6.5 Identification of the module-terminals ETGB 004 (MPK 400 / 4000) in the menu
Module Menu Module Menu Module Menu R1 1 (C) E3 3 (X) A5 6 (O) R2 2 (C) A3 4 (O) A6 7 (U) R3 3 (X) E4/A4* 5 (U) A7 8 (O)
A8 9 (O)
*either E4 or A4 programmable
Notice: The terminals E3 and A3 are available, if:
- the setting of terminal R3 is deleted (menu)
- jumper J3 is in position A
E3A3
J3 R3A
E3A3
J3 R3B
Jumperposition A: Jumperposition B:
Terminal type:
(C) = call = input and output (U) = input or output (X) = call or Input (O) = output
I / 10 05-03-16
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
2 LED – indicators on the front panel
Run Is blinking when control is switched on. Info This LED indicates a fault entry in the event log. LED is not on when the event log only contains report entries. Special This LED indicates a special operational mode of the control (e.g. landing calls off, inspection, random calls). Gesperrt / Blocked This LED indicates a block of the control. You find the reason of the block in the event log.
Operating voltage 5 V The proc. operational voltage is recognised 24 V The output operational voltage is
recognised. U1 The control voltage is recognised. Safety circuit U2 The passive safety circuit is closed U3 Emergency stop is inactive. U4 All door contacts are closed. U5 The car doors are closed. U6 The lock contact is closed. Reference Reference point for regulator (only APS) Auf / Up The act. travel direction is upwards. Ab / Down The act. travel direction is downwards. Speed vR "vR" is active.* v5 "v5" is active.* v4 "v4" is active.* v3 "v3" is active.* v2 "v2" is active.* v1 "v1" is active.* v0 "v0" is active.* vI "vI" is active.* vN "vN" is active.* Pos. Oben / Top The input correction TOP is active. Pos. Bündig / Level The lift is at floor level. Pos. Unten / Bottom The input correction BOTTOM is active. * This LED is only active with AC-regulated lifts.
Serial interfaces A TD Serial interf. ch. A sending data A RD Serial interf. ch. A receiving data B TD Serial interf. ch. B sending data B RD Serial interf. ch. B receiving data Net interface S Data S-Net sends/receives data. G Data G-Net (group) sends/receives data. S Active S-Net is active. G Active G-Net (group) is active. Digital selector DSK Zone Zone signal is active. DSK Status General status display Störung / Fault Regulator fault Halt /Lift Stop Regulator stop Freigabe / Enable Regulator enable Reg. 1 (not available) Reg. 2 (not available) Reg. 3 (not available) Reg. 4 (not available) Reg. 5 (not available) Reversal functions door Tür / Door 1 Rev. “photocell", "door open button" or "pressure
contact" are active. Tür / Door 2 Rev. ”photocell", "door open button" or "pressure
contact" are active.
The BST-modules of MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 do not include all LED-indicators.
05-03-16 I / 11
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction
3 Help by faults 3.1 Function <<Event log>>
Selector faultno zone signalMo. 11.02.02 13:45:37No.3 Fl.: 5 Door: -
Information
Event logFaul. 3 / Mess. 5Since delete 8Continue with OK
InformationOperation status
InformationEvent log
InformationEvent logDisplay
OK
1.
OK
3.2.
OK4. OK5.
6.
Handling: 1.: select <<Information>> and press OK-button 2.: select <<Event log>> 3.: press OK-button 4.: function <<dispaly>> - press OK-button 5.: continue with OK-button 6.: select entries
The event log stores faults and messages. The menu "Information event log" can be used to display, print out or cancel the contents of the memory. It has a 50 event capacity. Each record displays date, real time, actual floor level and a series No. A fault entry also shows actual travel direction and the latest approached door side.
Two entry-types: 1. Messages (only for information, with abbreviation <<Mess.>> in the display) 2. Faults (with abbreviation <<Door:->> in the display)
Abbreviation used in this chapter:
DFÜ: Data remote LRV: Regulator print for hydraulic. driven (Com. Beringer) DSK: Digital selector LS: Photocell
Eb./Fl.: Floor SHK: Safety circuit EM: Extension module
You can find a list of event log entries at the end of this instruction (see side I-A/1).
Notice: The first character of the entry is the sorting.
3.2 Function <<Operational status>>
Contactor monitor Information
Control voltage Operation status
Voltage monitoring
Fl.:1 special
(Normal-display) (Menu-display)
The operational status of the control system is constantly shown as the normal display. This non-coded display gives maintenance personnel a continuous overview of the entire installation. Should other important operational situations
You can find a list of operational status at the end of this instruction (see side I-A/1).
Notice: The first character of the entry is the sorting.
I / 12 05-03-16
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
3.3 Function <<Test module>>
Using this menu control inputs and outputs can be displayed. This menu can be selected in the main menu <<Information / Test module>>
1.
+-! 3.
A: 01
Input:
A: 04
Output:
Safety circuit
Motor
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
+ -2.
4.OKOK
Handling: 1.: select menuline 2.: select address, input or output !.: selection of the terminals No. 0-7only by outputs possible 3.: select terminal 4.: set/reset 24V signal
Attention! Do not set output signals while the lift is in use!
Voltage monitor
Bit 0 Terminal 201Bit 1 Terminal 200Bit 2 Ter. 205 (Motor)Bit 3 Ter. 210 (call+outp.)Bit 4 False voltage monitorBit 5 PTCBit 6 reserved internalBit 7 reserved internal
Examp. BST 40 -I/OMotor
Bit 0 Relay K31Bit 1 Relay K32Bit 2 Relay K33Bit 3 Relay K34Bit 4 Relay K35Bit 5 Relay v1/2Bit 6 reserved internalBit 7 reserved internal
Inputs address 00 Outputs address 04
FKF ID: 1IO (1 - 8): FKF ID: 1IO (17-24):
Terminal 1 - 8
Bit 0 Car call 1Bit 1 Car call 2Bit 2 Car call 3Bit 3 Car call 4Bit 4 Car call 5Bit 5 Car call 6Bit 6 Car call 7Bit 7 Car call 8
Examp. Net-I/O FKF 40Terminal 17 - 24
Bit 0 (TE1)Bit 1 (TE2)Bit 2 (TE3)Bit 3 (TE4)Bit 4 Impulse / level upBit 5 Impulse / level downBit 6 Correction topBit 7 Correction bottom
FKF 40 FKF 40
= Sig. set = , 0 = Sig. n. set, - = Terminal without function Terminal type: I = Input, O = Output, C = call (Inp./Outp.)
C C C C C C C C* 0 * 0 * 0 0 0I I I I0 0 0 0 * * 0 *
I I I I
A: 00 Voltage monitorInput: * * * * * * 6 7A: 04 MotorOutput: 0 * * 3 4 5 6 7
* = Signal set =
*
05-03-16 I / 13
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction
A: 04 RegulatorInput: * * * 3 4 5 6 7A: 00 motorOutput: 0 * 2 3 4 5 6 7
Regulator
Bit 0 Regulator faultBit 1 Regulator stopBit 2 Enable regulatorBit 3 v < 0,3 m/sBit 4 v < 0,5 m/sBit 5 OverspeedBit 6 BreakBit 7 Contators
Examp. BST-I/O: "Travel with V-fast (speed)"Motor
Bit 0 v 1Bit 1 v 2Bit 2 v 3Bit 3 v 4Bit 4 v 5Bit 5 v NBit 6 v IBit 7 v R
Inputs address 04 Outputs address 00
FKF 1_0_00I/O (1-8): IRP 1_1_00I/O (1-8):
Terminal 1 - 8
Bit 0 Correction topBit 1 Correction bottomBit 2 Prelimit switch topBit 3 Prelimit switch bott.Bit 4 InspectionBit 5 Inspection upBit 6 Inspection downBit 7 Full-load
Examp. Net-I/O IRP and FKFTerminal 1 - 8
Bit 0 Push butt. door openBit 1 Push butt. door closeBit 2 n.c.Bit 3 n.c.Bit 4 Display-segm. 1Bit 5 Display-segm. 2Bit 6 Display-segm. 3Bit 7 Display-segm. 4
FKF IRP
0 = Signal not set, - = Terminal no function
C C C C C C C C* 0 * 0 * 0 0 0C C C C0 0 - - 0 0 0 0
C C C C
* = Signal set =
* = Signal set = Terminal type: I = Input, O = Output, C = call (Inp./Outp.)
A: 07 A10 IO 9 - 16Input: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7A: 07 A10 IO 1 - 8Input: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Examp. BST (MPK 400); A10 = Extension module No. 0
In the case of the ETG-B004 module, the above-mentioned terminal types are displayed in addition to a "U" for input or output, and an
"X" for call or output in the test adapter function. Further information on this module is provided by the technical description in the
chapter titled "ETG-B004 floor module“
Terminal description device MPK-Menu * Default set up Note
R1 1 (C) Call up R2 2 (C) Call down. R3 3 (X) Priority call E3 3 (X) Free [1] A3 4 (O) Free
E4/A4 5 (U) Free [2] A5 6 (O) hall latern up group.no.* [3] A6 7 (O) hall latern down grp.no.* [3] A7 8 (O) hall latern up grp.no 2 A8 9 (O) hall latern down grp.no 2
*terminal type: (C) = call (input and output); (X) = call or input; (U) = input or output; (O) = output
[1]: The terminals are available in the menu, if the function „priority call“ is deleted from the terminal R3 and the jumper J3 is in
the position A!
[2]: Either input or output!
[3]: * = current group-no. see menu setting
I / 14 05-03-16
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
3.3.1 Address-set-up BST-inputs
MPK 40 MPK 400 MPK 4000
Addr. Bit voltage supervision voltage supervision voltage supervision 00 0 supervision: term. 201 supervision: term. 201 supervision: +24V-p.supply 1 supervision: term. 200 supervision: term. 200 supervision: term. 201 2 supervision: motor signal supervision: motor signal supervision: term. 200 3 supervision: term. 207 (calls) supervision: outputs supervision: fault voltage mon. 4 supervision: fault voltage mon. supervision: fault voltage mon. reserved internal 5 supervision: PTC supervision: PTC reserved internal 6 reserved internal reserved internal reserved internal 7 reserved internal landing control on/off (S35) reserved internal
Addr. Bit safety circuit safety circuit safety circuit 01 0 U1 U1 U1 1 U2 U2 U2 2 U3 U3 U3 3 U4 U4 U4 4 U5 U5 U5 5 U6 U6 U6 6 reserved internal reserved internal PTC motor 7 reserved internal reserved internal PTC oil
Addr. Bit free selectable inputs not available switches 02 0 E1 / contactor monitor ** call to top 1 E2 / safety module * call to bottom 2 E3 / zone safety module * service operation doors 3 E4 / electr. emerg. operat. on * landing control on/off (S35) 4 E5 / electr. emerg. op. (up) * reserved internal 5 E6 / electr. emerg. op. (down) * reserved internal 6 E7 / shutdown night off * reserved internal 7 E8 / monitoring light voltage * reserved internal
Addr. Bit landing calls 1-8 free selectable inputs not available 03 0 R1 E1 / contactor monitor ** 1 R2 E2 / safety module * 2 R3 E3 / zone safety module * 3 R4 E4 / electr. emerg. operat. on * 4 R5 E5 / electr. emerg. op. (up) * 5 R6 E6 / electr. emerg. op. (down) * 6 R7 E7 / shutdown night off * 7 R8 E8 / monitoring light voltage *
Addr. Bit switch not available regulator 04 0 landing control on/off (S35) regulator fault 1 reserved internal regulator stop 2 reserved internal enable regulator 3 reserved internal V < 0,3 m/s *** 4 reserved internal V < 0,5 m/s *** 5 reserved internal overspeed *** 6 reserved internal break *** 7 reserved internal contactors ***
Addr. Bit not available not available landing calls 1-8 06 0 R1 1 R2 2 R3 3 R4 4 R5 5 R6 6 R7 7 R8
* Default set-up ** set-up fixed *** function not yet available
05-03-16 I / 15
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction
MPK 40 MPK 400 MPK 4000
Addr. Bit not available not available free selectable inputs 07 0 E1 / contactor monitor ** 1 E2 / safety module ** 2 E3 / zone safety module ** 3 E4 / elec. emerg. operat. on ** 4 E5 / elec. emerg. operat. (up) ** 5 E6 / elec. emerg. op. (down) ** 6 E7 / shutdown night off * 7 E8 / monitoring light voltage *
Addr. Bit not available not available free selectable inputs 08 0 E9 / readiness service * 1 E10 / emerg. supply control * 2 E11 / emergency power travel * 3 E12 / active for emerg. supply * 4 E13 / remote switch group * 5 E14 / travel lock * 6 E15 / brake monitoring * 7 E16 / fireman’s control out. *
* Default set-up ** set-up fixed
I / 16 05-03-16
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
3.3.2 Address-set-up BST-outputs
MPK 40 MPK 400 MPK 4000
Addr. Bit not available not available motor 00 0 v 1 (intermed. speed) 1 v 2 (fast speed) 2 v 3 3 v 4 4 v 5 5 v N (relevel.) 6 v I (inspection) 7 v R (elec. emergency operat.)
Addr. Bit not available not available motor 01 0 relay K 31 (up) 1 relay K 32 (down) 2 relay K 33 3 relay K 34 4 relay K 35 (valve control)* 5 v ½ 6 ref. point 7 v 0 (slow speed)
Addr. Bit free selectable outputs not available not available 02 0 A1 / relevelling / decelerated * 1 A2 / shutdown night off * 2 A3 / bridge S10 * 3 A4 / coll. fault register * 4 A5 / in use –light * 5 A6 / out of service * 6 A7 / lock magnet * 7 A8 / valve control *
Addr. Bit landing calls 1-8 not available not available 03 0 R1 1 R2 2 R3 3 R4 4 R5 5 R6 6 R7 7 R8
Addr. Bit Motor motor Processor LPK 04 0 relay K 31 (up) relay K 31 (up) reserved internal 1 relay K 32 (down) relay K 32 (down) reserved internal 2 relay K 33 relay K 33 reserved internal 3 relay K 34 relay K 34 reserved internal 4 relay K 35 (valve control)* relay K 35 (valve control)* reserved internal 5 v ½ v ½ reserved internal 6 reserved internal reserved internal reserved internal 7 reserved internal reserved internal reserved internal
Addr. Bit not available free selectable outputs not available 05 0 A1 / relevelling / decelerated * 1 A2 / shutdown night off * 2 A3 / bridge S10 * 3 A4 / coll. fault register * 4 A5 / in use –light * 5 A6 / out of service * 6 A7 / lock magnet * 7 A8 / valve control *
* Default set-up
05-03-16 I / 17
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction
MPK 40 MPK 400 MPK 4000
Addr. Bit not available not available landing calls 1-8 BST 06 0 R1 1 R2 2 R3 3 R4 4 R5 5 R6 6 R7 7 R8
Addr. Bit not available not available free selectable outputs 07 0 A1 / relevelling / decelerated ** 1 A2 / coll. fault register * 2 A3 / fault reg. doors * 3 A4 / bridge S10 * 4 A5 / door contr. open door 1 * 5 A6 / door contr. close door 1 * 6 A7 / door contr. open door 2 * 7 A8 / door contr. close door 2 *
Addr. Bit not available not available free selectable outputs 08 0 A9 / at readiness floor * 1 A10 / at emerg. return floor * 2 A11 / emerg. power sequence * 3 A12 / priority * 4 A13 / overall priority * 5 A14 / out of service * 6 A15 / in use-light * 7 A16 / travel requirement *
* Default set-up ** set-up fixed
3.3.3 MPK 400: Address-set-up extension modules
Module-no.*: 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Addresses term. 1-8: 07 09 0B 0D 0F 11 13 15
Addresses term. 9-16: 06 08 0A 0C 0E 10 12 14
* The module-no. Is set-up with the rotary coding switch on the extension-module. You set-up only for the unit place. The menu displays the module with no. 10 – 17.
Notice for extension-module no. 17: The set-up of the terminals 1 – 8 is fixed! The signals v-electr. emergency operation, v3, v4, v5, reference point are available only with extension-module no. 17 on terminal 9 – 16.
Adr. Term. Bit Set-up extension module no. 17 15 1 0 v-relev. (output) 2 1 v0 (output) 3 2 v-Inspection (output) 4 3 v1 (output) 5 4 v2 (output) 6 5 Regulator fault (input) 7 6 Regulator electr. stop (input) 8 7 Regulator enable (input)
I / 18 05-03-16
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
3.3.4 MPK 400/4000: Address-set-up FKI with IM40 -01 / -03 / -10 / -11 / -12
I/O: C Call Function 1 R1 car call door 1 floor 1* 2 R2 car call door 1 floor 2* 3 R3 car call door 1 floor 3* 4 R4 car call door 1 floor 4* 5 R5 car call door 1 floor 5* 6 R6 car call door 1 floor 6* 7 R7 car call door 1 floor 7* 8 R8 *** car call door 1 floor 8*
I/O: I Input Function I/O: O Output Function 9 E1 photocell door 1 41 A1 door contr. open door 1 * 10 E2 press. contact door 1 * 42 A2 door contr. close door 1 * 11 E3 open limit switch door 1 * 43 A3 door contr. open door 2 * 12 E4 close limit switch door 1 * 44 A4 door contr. close door 2 * 13 E5 photocell door 2 * 45 A5 shutdown night off * 14 E6 press. contact door 2 * 46 A6 fan output * 15 E7 open limit switch door 2 * 47 A7 free * 16 E8 close limit switch door 2 * 48 A8 free * 17 TE1 door push button open door 1 * 49 D1 display segment 1 * 18 TE2 door push button close door 1 * 50 D2 display segment 2 * 19 TE3 landing control off * 51 D3 display segment 3 * 20 TE4 *** fan push button* 52 D4 display segment 4 * 21 12A floor level / relevell. / imp. up ** 53 D5 display segment 5 * 22 12B fl. level / relevell. / imp. down ** 54 D6 display segment 6 * 23 13A correction top ** 55 D7 display segment 7 * 24 13B correction bottom ** 56 D8 *** display segment 8 * 25 60 inspection ** 57 D9 up -arrow * 26 60A inspection travel up ** 58 D10 down –arrow * 27 60B inspection travel down ** 59 TA1 overload * 28 63 overload ** 60 TA2 *** free *
* Standard set-up ** set-up fixed *** terminal not available on IM 10
05-03-16 I / 19
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction
3.3.5 MPK 400: Address-set-up FKP
I/O: C Call Function I/O: C Call Function 1 R1 car call door 1 floor 1* 41 R17 car call door 1 floor 17* 2 R2 car call door 1 floor 2* 42 R18 car call door 1 floor 18* 3 R3 car call door 1 floor 3* 43 R19 car call door 1 floor 19* 4 R4 car call door 1 floor 4* 44 R20 car call door 1 floor 20* 5 R5 car call door 1 floor 5* 45 R21 car call door 1 floor 21* 6 R6 car call door 1 floor 6* 46 R22 car call door 1 floor 22* 7 R7 car call door 1 floor 7* 47 R23 car call door 1 floor 23* 8 R8 car call door 1 floor 8* 48 R24 car call door 1 floor 24* 33 R9 car call door 1 floor 9* 49 R25 car call door 1 floor 25* 34 R10 car call door 1 floor 10* 50 R26 car call door 1 floor 26* 35 R11 car call door 1 floor 11* 51 R27 car call door 1 floor 27* 36 R12 car call door 1 floor 12* 52 R28 car call door 1 floor 28* 37 R13 car call door 1 floor 13* 53 R29 car call door 1 floor 29* 38 R14 car call door 1 floor 14* 54 R30 car call door 1 floor 30* 39 R15 car call door 1 floor 15* 55 R31 car call door 1 floor 31* 40 R16 car call door 1 floor 16* 56 R32 car call door 1 floor 32*
I/O: I Input Function I/O: O Output Function 9 E1 photocell door 1 57 A1 door contr. open door 1 * 10 E2 press. contact door 1 * 58 A2 door contr. close door 1 * 11 E3 open limit switch door 1 * 59 A3 door contr. open door 2 * 12 E4 close limit switch door 1 * 60 A4 door contr. close door 2 * 13 E5 photocell door 2 * 61 A5 shutdown night off * 14 E6 press. contact door 2 * 62 A6 fan output * 15 E7 open limit switch door 2 * 63 A7 free * 16 E8 close limit switch door 2 * 64 A8 free * 17 TE1 door push button open door 1 * 65 D1 display segment 1 * 18 TE2 door push button close door 1 * 66 D2 display segment 2 * 19 TE3 landing control off * 67 D3 display segment 3 * 20 TE4 fan push button* 68 D4 display segment 4 * 21 12A floor level / relevell. / imp. up * 69 D5 display segment 5 * 22 12B fl. level / relevell. / imp. down * 70 D6 display segment 6 * 23 13A correction top * 71 D7 display segment 7 * 24 13B correction bottom * 72 D8 display segment 8 * 25 60 inspection * 73 D9 up -arrow * 26 60A inspection travel up * 74 D10 down –arrow * 27 60B inspection travel down * 75 TA1 overload * 28 63 overload * 76 TA2 free *
* Standard set-up
I / 20 05-03-16
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
3.3.6 MPK 40: A.-set-up of the modules: FKF40 with IM 40 -01 / -03 / -10 / -11 / -12, WFA 40
Test adapter IM 40 -01 / -03 / -10 / -11 / -12 WFA 40 I/O: Car call: Output: 1 R1** 21w / hall lantern up ** 2 R2** 22w / hall lantern up ** 3 R3** 23w / hall lantern up ** 4 R4** 24w / hall lantern up ** 5 R5** 25w / hall lantern up ** 6 R6** 26w / hall lantern up ** 7 R7** 27w / hall lantern up ** 8 R8** 28w / hall lantern up **
Input: Output: 9 E1 / photocell door 1 * 21u / hall lantern down ** 10 E2 / press. contact door 1 * 22u / hall lantern down ** 11 E3 / open limit switch door 1 * 23u / hall lantern down ** 12 E4 / close limit switch door 1 * 24u / hall lantern down ** 13 E5 / photocell door 2 * 25u / hall lantern down ** 14 E6 / press. contact door 2 * 26u / hall lantern down ** 15 E7 / open limit switch door 2 * 27u / hall lantern down ** 16 E8 / close limit switch door 2 * 28u / hall lantern down ** 17 TE1 / door push but. open door 1 * - 18 TE2 / door push but. close door 1 * - 19 TE3 / landing control off * - 20 TE4 / fan push button * - 21 12A / fl. lev. / relevel. / imp. up ** - 22 12B / fl. lev. / relevel. / imp. down ** - 23 13A / correction top ** - 24 13B / correction bottom ** - 25 60 / inspection ** - 26 60A / inspection travel up ** - 27 60B / inspection travel down ** - 28 63 / overload ** -
Output: 29 A1 / door contr. open door 1 * - 30 A2 / door contr. close door 1 * - 31 A3 / door contr. open door 2 * - 32 A4 / door contr. close door 2 * - 33 A5 / shutdown night off * - 34 A6 / fan output * - 35 A7 / free * - 36 A8 / free * - 37 D1 / display segment 1 * - 38 D2 / display segment 2 * - 39 D3 / display segment 3 * - 40 D4 / display segment 4 * - 41 D5 / display segment 5 * - 42 D6 / display segment 6 * - 43 D7 / display segment 7 * - 44 D8 / display segment 8 * - 45 D9 / arrow-up ** - 46 D10 / arrow- down ** - 47 TA1 / overload * - 48 TA2 / free* -
* Default set-up ** set-up fixed
05-03-16 I / 21
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction
3.4 Function <<Group members>>
The function displays all controls, which the group net contains and the act. status of the controls.
InformationGroup membersNo.: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8St.: + - * * * - - -
All group membersStatus
Sign of the act. group-No.
Status Description
- The control is not into the group net.
+ The control is into the group net, but not active. (special situation; for examp.: maintenance op.)
* The control is into the group net and active.
3.5 Function <<Module list>>
The function shows the modules into the network and the operation status.
Information
Module list
FKF 1 o 1 tot 4
SLON 1_0_00 ACTIVE
B
A
C D
EFG
A Selected module type (term)
B Module-no. of the same module types
C Numbers of the same module types
D Numbers of modules into the database of the BST
E Operation status of the module <<Ready>>:
• The module is connected to the power supply and the network. • The module is recorded of the BST. • The module sends no I/O-information to the BST. • The status is continuous to <<Active>>
<<Active>>: • The module is working with the BST.
<<Reset>>: • The module status was <<READY>> / <<ACTIVE>>, but not available! • Cause: ETG-location is deleted, no valid location
<<Fault>>: • The module reports a fault and is INACTIVE!. • Cause: Module defect
F Location of the module „G_T_EE“: Group-No. (G), Door side (T), Level (EE)
G Network type
I / 22 05-03-16
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
4 Menu <<Testing / Maintenance>> (MPK 40 / 400) 4.1 Menu structure and presettings
Testing/Maintenance
Presetting
Door BlockingSave events
Completion
Start time monitorJourney time monitorBraking time monitorReset travmonit. err
Final limit switch
Traction
Speed-monitoring
Door control
Weight balance
Car safety gear
Counterw.safety gearTest buffers
Over-speedSet call
Test travel speed
Alarm-Filter
The <<Testing / Maintenance>> main menu provides all the functions needed for commissioning, acceptance tests and maintenance / repairs.
On its <<YES>> setting, the <<Door blocking>> function prevents the doors of a cabin from opening on arrival of the cabin at a floor.
On its <<YES>> setting, the <<Save events>> function allows entries in the event log also while tests are in progress. To disable the event log, set this function to <<NO>>.
The <<Test travel speed>> function is used to specify<<v-insp>>, <<v-el. emerg. op. >> or <<v1 to v5>> as a test value. Speed assignments are provided in the nxt chapter titled "Overview of the testing travels".
After completing work, reset the modified parameters in the <<Door blocking>> and <<Save events>> functions to their initial values.
On its <<NO>> setting, the <<Alarm-Filter>> function cuts off the filter of the emergency call signal under the regulations EN81-28.
Individual tests are listed under the <<Completion>> menu item. When this sub-menu is invoked, the control program automatically deletes all existent travel commands, blocks acceptance of further calls and terminates any travel in progress at the next possible level.
To allow test runs to be performed, you must parametrize the <<Completion/Testing>> terminal function to one input
and apply +24V to it. A signal change from +24V to 0V interrupts the current test procedure. After completing your tests, remove the +24V input signal again!
Conduction of tests according to TRA102 and EN81-1 is described in Chapter 2.2 (TRA102) and Appendix D
(EN81-1).
Start time monitor
Travel down = up =
Fl. 1
All test runs are started by pressing the arrow key for the desired direction of travel and holding the key down for the required duration.
Start time monitor
Travel down = up =
Fl. 1 entry
Display with OK
While a test run is in progress, the menu displays a new entry in the event log. You can press the OK button to directly invoke the event log and read this entry. Press the ESC key to return from the event log display to the test function. The test menu window indicates disabling of the lift system together with the related reason. * Prerequisite: The <<Save events>> function must be set to <<Yes>>.
05-03-16 I / 23
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction
Test/Maintenance
Completion
……
Impossible to test
Note: The above-mentioned test runs are not performed when:
- cabin is in motion. - inspections- or electrical emergency-operation is active. - lift is blocked due „passive safety circuit“. - control program is in the RESET-status. - for testing <<Speed monitoring>> no <<DCP-4>> is set.
4.2 Overview of the testing travels
Func
tion
Men
u pu
sh b
utto
ns
Spee
d [1
]
Cor
rect
ion
/ Pre
limit
switc
hes
eval
uate
[2]
Stop
in th
e lim
it flo
ors
[3]
Info
rmat
ion
in th
e di
spla
y
Com
men
t
<<Start time monitor>>
vN Yes Yes • current floor Start the test with switch-copier-systems from floor level.
<<Journey time monitor>>
vN Yes Yes • current floor -
<<Braking time monitor>>
vN Yes Yes • current floor -
<<Speed monitoring>>
vN Yes Yes • current floor Use the test only with DCP4.
<<Final limit switch>> vP Yes Yes • current floor -
<<Traction>> vP No No • current floor
• type of cabin motion upw., downw., no or watch the drive
Use the test only with rope drives. The menu displays <<type of cabin motion upw., downw., no>> only with APS.
<<Weight balance>> - - No • current floor
• Brake closed/opened
• type of cabin motion upw., downw., no or watch the drive
Use the test only with rope drives. The menu displays <<type of cabin motion upw., downw., no>> only with APS.
<<Car safety gear>> vP Yes No • current floor
• type of cabin motion upw., downw., no or watch the drive
Use the test out of correction- / pre limit switches. The menu displays <<type of cabin motion upw., downw., no>> only with APS.
<<Counterw. Safety gear>>
vP Yes No • current floor
• type of cabin motion upw., downw., no or watch the drive
Use the test out of correction- / pre limit switches. The menu displays <<type of cabin motion upw., downw., no>> only with APS.
<<Test buffers>> vP No No • current floor -
<<Over speed>> vP Yes No • current floor
• type of cabin motion upw., downw., no or watch the drive
Use the test out of correction- / pre limit switches. The menu displays <<type of cabin motion upw., downw., no>> only with APS.
[1] vN: max. speed. vP: pre selected speed in the menu <<Testing/Maintenance, presetting / test travel speed>> (v-insp, v-el. emerg. op. or v1 to v5). It is possible, that the shaft copier system restricts the speeds (s.[2]).
[2] Yes: Start- and braking- speed are dependent on the correction- and pre limit switches. No: Start with vN or vP. NO braking at the limit floors!
[3] Yes: The lift stops at the limit floor. No: The lift stops not at the limit floor.
I / 24 05-03-16
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Instruction
4.3 Function <<Start-, journey-, braking time monitor>>
The specifications under <<Settings / travel monitor>> are retained. For the purpose of testing, the control program automatically shortens the monitoring times.
Travel monitor Time monitor Travel target Speed
<<Start time monitor>> 1 s Limit floor of direction of travel
<<Journey time monitor>> 0,5 s Limit floor of direction of travel
<<Braking time monitor>> 0,5 s Max. 2 floors from the current floor in the direction of travel
With respect to floor spacing; maximum possible speed
4.4 Function <<Reset travel monitor error>>
If a test under <<Start-, journey-, braking time monitor>> results in disabling, this function performs enabling again. This function can only be used to re-enable journey test times, It cannot be used to perform re-enabling following triggering of a PTC resistor, for example.
4.5 Function <<Speed monitoring>>
In the case of frequency-regulated drives with DCP4 control and an additional S19 limit speed switch, this menu item can be used to check the switch's functionality. The specified limit speed is not considered during this check. Only a change in the signal of switch S19 from +24V to 0V is monitored. To perform this test, press the arrow key for the desired direction of travel and hold the key down for the required duration. The test proves successful if the control system interrupts the journey on a change of the signal from switch S19.
4.6 Function <<Door control>>
Door side 1
Side = ± cl.= op.=
Fl.: 1
This function is used to open and close the cabin doors irrespective of the cabin's position in the shaft and the <<No door>> parameters in the door table. The +/-keys can be used to select the door side, the arrow keys to control door movement, which only takes place while the keys are held down.
4.7 Function <<Set call>>
Set call
Call bottom= top=
Fl.: 1
To issue a command to travel to the highest or lowest level, press the corresponding arrow key. To interrupt a journey at once, press the ESC key.
05-03-16 I / 25
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Event log entries
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System I – A / 1
Activation, APS-Learn. Operation [M]Explanation: The APS-Learn. Operation has been activated. Possib. cause: -
Activation, APS-Learning Travel [M]Explanation: The APS-Learning travel has been activated. Possib. cause: -
Activation, Emerg. Power Contr. [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "Emerg. Power Contr." was set. Possib. cause: -
Activation, Fire Evacu. Service [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "Fire Evacu. Service" was set. Possib. cause: -
Activation, FireFight. Ctrl. Ext [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "FireFight. Ctrl. Ext" was set. Possib. cause: -
Activation, FireFight. Ctrl. Int [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "FireFight. Ctrl. Int" was set. Possib. cause: -
Activation, Input Alarm [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "Alarm" was set. Possib. cause: -
Activation, Readiness Service [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "Readiness Service" was set. Possib. cause: -
autom. Function Test, Function Error Test* [F]Explanation: The displayed test Test*was passed faulty.
*the name of the test is displayed, where the error occurs Possib. cause: The checked function is faulty.
autom. Function Test, Function Monitoring [M]Explanation: This is the message of the selftest. Possib. cause: -
autom. Function Test, Impossible to Test Test* [F]Explanation: The basics (freeprogr. Inp./Outp.)to check the function Test* are not existing. *the name of the test is displayed, where
the error occurs Possib. cause: Check the necessary Inputs/Outputs.
autom. Function Test, Test completed [M]Explanation: A cycle test was completed. Possib. cause: -
autom. Function Test, Test interrupted Operation Status* [F]Explanation: A test sequence was interrupted by another operation status operation status*. *the name of the operation status will
displayed, who has prevented or interrupted the test sequence Possib. cause: -
autom. Function Test, Test not started Operation Status* [F]Explanation: A test sequence was prevented due to higher priority operation status operation status*. *the name of the operation
status will displayed, who has prevented or interrupted the test sequence Possib. cause: -
autom. Function Test, Timed Out Test* [F]Explanation: The test sequence test* could not be finished during the expacting time. *the name of the test is displayed, where the
error occurs Possib. cause: Travel interrupt; door(s) is/are blocked
card-fault, BST / APS [F]Explanation: The APS print was not recognized by the controller. Possib. cause: Wrong BST-Version;check the connection to the MAPS print
card-fault, car calls [F]Explanation: The car call print has not been recognized by the controller. Possib. cause: print missing or defect
card-fault, MAPS-Module [F]Explanation: The MAPS-module was not recognized by the controller. Possib. cause: Print is missing or defect; check the contact of the MAPS-module and the controller.
card-fault, MDSK-module [F]Explanation: After switching on the MDSK print was not recognized by the control. Possib. cause: check parametern in the basis settings menu check connections to the MDSK print; check status LED on the DSK print
card-fault, motor [F]Explanation: The dirve print has not been recognized by the controller (only for regulated traction lifts). Possib. cause: print missing or defect
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Event log entries
I – A / 2 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System
card-fault, Standard-LPK [F]Explanation: After power on / RESET no LPK-card was identified. Possib. cause: Wrong LPK-program version; no contact to the processor unit
Deactivation, APS-Learn. Operation [M]Explanation: The APS-Learn. Operation has been deactivated. Possib. cause: -
Deactivation, APS-Learning Travel [M]Explanation: The APS-Learning travel has been deactivated. Possib. cause: -
Deactivation, Emerg. Power Contr. [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "Emerg. Power Contr." was cut off. Possib. cause: -
Deactivation, Fire Evacu. Service [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "Fire Evacu. Service" was cut off. Possib. cause: -
Deactivation, FireFight. Ctrl. Ext [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "FireFight. Ctrl. Ext" was cut off. Possib. cause: -
Deactivation, FireFight. Ctrl. Int [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "FireFight. Ctrl. Int" was cut off. Possib. cause: -
Deactivation, Input Alarm [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "Alarm" was cut off. Possib. cause: -
Deactivation, Readiness Service [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "Readiness Service" was cut off. Possib. cause: -
door blocking, no. of stop blocked [M]Explanation: All floors/doors are blocked. Possib. cause: Too many floors/doors blocked via modules / menu.
door fault, Blocked Due Cl. Limit [F]Explanation: The indicated door was blocked when closing. Possib. cause: check door drive; check door mechanism; check door closed limit switch
door fault, Blocked Due Op. Limit [F]Explanation: The indicated door was blocked when opening. Possib. cause: check door drive; check door mechanism; check door open limit switch
door fault, Check Lock Bounce Time [F]Explanation: The set time for lock contact bounce is too short. Possib. cause: extend lock contact bounce timer; check lock mechanism
door fault, door close fault [F]Explanation: The door closing monitor registered an unsuccessful door closing operation. Possib. cause: check door drive; check door mechanism
door fault, Door Lock Fault [F]Explanation: The door closing monitor registered an unsuccessful door lock operation. Possib. cause: check door time; check door lock
door fault, photocell blocked [F]Explanation: The photocell ist blocked or faulty. Possib. cause: check photocell
drive, no no Serial Motor Link [F]Explanation: The drive system doesn´t support a serial data link. Possib. cause: Only the driving typs ´Variable Freq. AC´ and ´Hydr. Variable Freq.´ support a serial data link. If any other driving typ has
been choosed the serial data link has to be set to ´inactiv´.
drive, Serial Motor Link [F]Explanation: The MPK and the regulator are using a different serial protocol. Possib. cause: Set both the MPK and the regulator to the same serial protocol.
Emerg. Power Control, no more attempt [F]Explanation: Max. number of starts to the emerg. power floor is reached. Possib. cause: Faults, which prevent the starts.
event log, ***** deleted ***** [M]Explanation: The event log was deleted at the indicated time. Possib. cause: -
event log, starts on [M]Explanation: Time of start of event logging. Possib. cause: -
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Event log entries
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System I – A / 3
Extension Module, 24V-supply [F]Explanation: Extension module without power supply. Possib. cause: Terminal + / - of the extension module not connected.
Extension Module, Faulty Component [F]Explanation: Extension module without identification from the processor. Possib. cause: Check the connection and the code-switch of the extension module.
Functional Test, Speed v1 [F]Explanation: The functional test has detected a difference between the speed output v1 to the drive and re-reading the speed comands. Possib. cause: None or faulty wiring; check the MPK and the drive
Functional Test, Speed v2 [F]Explanation: The functional test has detected a difference between the speed output v2 to the drive and re-reading the speed comands. Possib. cause: None or faulty wiring; check the MPK and the drive
Functional Test, Speed v3 [F]Explanation: The functional test has detected a difference between the speed output v3 to the drive and re-reading the speed comands. Possib. cause: None or faulty wiring; check the MPK and the drive
Functional Test, Speed v4 [F]Explanation: The functional test has detected a difference between the speed output v4 to the drive and re-reading the speed comands. Possib. cause: None or faulty wiring; check the MPK and the drive
Functional Test, Speed v5 [F]Explanation: The functional test has detected a difference between the speed output v5 to the drive and re-reading the speed comands. Possib. cause: None or faulty wiring; check the MPK and the drive
Functional Test, vEmergency Elec. Operation [F]Explanation: The functional test has detected a difference between the emergency electrical operation speed output to the drive and re-
reading the speed comands. Possib. cause: None or faulty wiring; check the MPK and the drive
Functional Test, vInspection [F]Explanation: The functional test has detected a difference between the inspection speed output to the drive and re-reading the speed
comands. Possib. cause: None or faulty wiring; check the MPK and the drive
GLON-module, 24V-supply [F]Explanation: No 24V-power supply for a module in the GLON-net. Possib. cause: Check the power supply connection to the module.
group operartion, not return to group [M]Explanation: After a fault is no return to the group possible. Possib. cause: No correct finish of a travel.
group operation, group-no. reserved [F]Explanation: Another lift is provided with the same group / lift-no. Possib. cause: Check the group / lift-no.
inspection, contactor monitor [F]Explanation: The contactor monitor has been activated during inspection travel. Possib. cause: main contactor defect main contactor contact failure
inspection, control voltage [F]Explanation: The control voltage supply has been interrupted. If the control voltage
supply returns, the controller restarts automatically. Possib. cause: check power supply of the control
inspection, FKF-monitor [F]Explanation: Inspection operation: No FKF- module is identified. Possib. cause: Module is not available; power supply fault; connection fault; program version fault
inspection, inverter enable [F]Explanation: The signal "inverter enable" cuts off at a travel while the inspection operation. Possib. cause: Check inverter and connection "inverter enable"
inspection, LRV contact inactive [F]Explanation: The SIUA.1 on the control card has tripped during inspect. travel. Possib. cause: check setting of the control card
inspection, Primary Safety Circ. [F]Explanation: The primary safety circuit has been opened. Possib. cause: check the over-speed governor
inspection, regulat. flt .active [F]Explanation: The regulator monitor has been activated during inspection travel. Possib. cause: check setting of the regulator
inspection, Regulator Connection [F]Explanation: Inspection operation: The serial connection between MPK and the regulator had or has been cut off. Possib. cause: Regulator has been turned off; faulty or non-present data line beetween MPK and the regulator; exchange terminal link 87
and terminal link 88; check the shielding of the chopper power supply; check the shielding of the data line; check the shielding of the motor power supply; faulty regulator hardware; faulty MPK hardware; faulty MAPS hardware
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Event log entries
I – A / 4 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System
inspection, regulator prewarning [F]Explanation: Inspection operation: The regulator announces a temperature that is less than 10 Grad Celsius under the treshold. Possib. cause: cooling insufficient; regulator overcharged; regulator dimension ist insufficient
inspection, slowdown monitoring [F]Explanation: Inspection operation: The slowdown monitoring module registered a fault. Possib. cause: Check slowdown monitor module; Check regulator set-up; Check drive; Check selector informations
inspection, thermistor [F]Explanation: The drive thermistor has tripped during inspection travel. Possib. cause: drive motor overheated
lift blocked due to APS [F]Explanation: Blocked due to a major fault. Possib. cause: no learning journey has taken place; serious fault
lift blocked due to brake wear [F]Explanation: The control input terminal "brake wear" has tripped Possib. cause: Check the brake, check the polarity of the input terminal
lift blocked due to contact. mon. [F]Explanation: The main contactor monitor has been activated. Possib. cause: main contactor defect; main contactor contact failure
lift blocked due to dig. selector [F]Explanation: Blocked due to a major fault. Possib. cause: no learning journey has taken place; serious fault
lift blocked due to drive [F]Explanation: No valid drive system has been set or the function test of the speed outputs has been triggered. Possib. cause: Set valid drive type in "basic settings" menu or faulty wiring to the drive / machine.
lift blocked due to false voltage [F]Explanation: The false voltage test equipment has recognized voltage greater than 60 volt at the control system (only possible with a
false voltage test equipment). Possib. cause: Check the wiring of shaft and car signals.
lift blocked due to FKF-monitor [F]Explanation: No FKF- module is identified in the SLON-net. Possib. cause: Module is not available; power supply fault; connection fault; program version fault
lift blocked due to group [F]Explanation: The controller has recognized a fault during group startup. Possib. cause: Check the settings for the group-ID.
lift blocked due to LRV contact [F]Explanation: The SIUA.1 on the control card has tripped. Possib. cause: check settings of the control card
lift blocked due to Motor Thermistor [F]Explanation: The drive thermistor has tripped. Possib. cause: drive has overheated
lift blocked due to reg.prewarn. [F]Explanation: The lift is blocked due to the regulator prewarning that is activ. Possib. cause: cooling insufficient; regulator overcharged; regulator dimension ist insufficient
lift blocked due to regulat. flt. [F]Explanation: The supervisory contact of the regulator has ben activated. Possib. cause: check regulator settings
lift blocked due to relevelling [F]Explanation: A fault has been found during relevelling. Possib. cause: the relevelling time has been exceeded the set no. of relevelling actions has been exceeded; check the relevelling impulse
switches; magnet switch defect
lift blocked due to safety circ. [F]Explanation: The passive safety circuit has been opened. Possib. cause: check all switches in the passive safety circuit; check control power supply voltage
lift blocked due to selector flt. [F]Explanation: Error in the shaft signals. Possib. cause: switching sequence error; magnet switch defect
lift blocked due to slowdown mon. [F]Explanation: The slowdown monitoring module registered a fault. Possib. cause: Check slowdown monitor module; Check regulator set-up; Check drive; Check selector informations
lift blocked due to travelmonitor [F]Explanation: One of the travel time monitors has over-run. Possib. cause: check start time monitor; check running time monitor; check decelleration time monitor; magnet switch defect
lift blocked due to Zone Switch [F]Explanation: A safety contact has tripped. Possib. cause: check settings of the safety features; check shaft signals in the safety module; magnet switch defect
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Event log entries
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System I – A / 5
lift blocked, change parameter [F]Explanation: Due the changes in operating parameters the lift has become blocked. Possib. cause: after changing parameters in basic settings the RESET button was not operated
Lift Blocked, due to Function Test [F]Explanation: An error occurs during the automatic fubction test. Possib. cause: One of the check function is faulty.
lift blocked, due to System Error [F]Explanation: Systemfault! Possib. cause: wrong controller components
lift blocked, Missing Group-LPK [F]Explanation: No group-LPK was identified after power on or reset. Possib. cause: Wrong LPK-program version; no connection to the processor unit
lift blocked, Missing Stand.-LPK [F]Explanation: No Standard-LPK-card was identified after power on or reset. Possib. cause: wrong LPK-program version; no connection to the processor unit
log off by:, (user name) [M]Explanation: The registered user logged off. Possib. cause: -
Log on by:, (user name) [M]Explanation: The registered user logged on. Possib. cause: -
LPK SLON-module, waiting for IRP [F]Explanation: No FKF- module is identified in the SLON-net. Possib. cause: Module is not available; power supply fault; connection fault; program version fault
maintenance finished [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "maintenance" was cut off. Possib. cause: -
maintenance situat. [M]Explanation: The signal of the input "maintenance" was set. Possib. cause: -
mess.: run time exceeded [M]Explanation: The set running time was reached. Possib. cause: -
mess.:, learn trav. valid [M]Explanation: A learning travel was successfullycompleted. Possib. cause: -
mess.:, programstart [M]Explanation: A "switch on" of the control, or operation of the RESET button has occurred. Possib. cause: -
mess.:, terminal unreserved [M]Explanation: One or more connections in the flexible terminals have been lost. Possib. cause: programm versions change has occured; check connections in the flexible terminals
mess.:, trip no. reached [M]Explanation: The trip counter setting was reached. Possib. cause: -
modem fault no phone no. [F]Explanation: No phone-no. set-up in the MPK. Possib. cause: No phone-no.
modem fault, connect. not pos. [F]Explanation: No init of the modem. Possib. cause: faulty initstring; modem is not compatible with Hayes-commands;
GPRS-PIN and/or the GPRS-Accesspoint is invalid/faulty
modem fault, modem not active [F]Explanation: No communication between MPK and modem Possib. cause: no modem connected; modem without power supply; faulty modem terminals; modem due diallog blocked
modemfault, connect. not pos. [F]Explanation: MPK can not constitute a connection with the remote device. Possib. cause: remote device was busy several times; faulty phone no. of remote device set in the controller
module ´number´, 24V-supply [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ´number´, is announcing a faulty 24V-supply. Possib. cause: power supply fault; connection fault.
module ´number´, counter fault [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ´number´, is announcing an internal counter fault. Possib. cause: internal fault.
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Event log entries
I – A / 6 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System
module ´number´, fifo overflow [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ´number´, is announcing an internal fifo overflow. Possib. cause: internal fault.
module ´number´, IO-error [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ´number´, is announcing a faulty input respectively output. Possib. cause: internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
module ´number´, life check [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ´number´, is announcing a life check error between the module and the BST. Possib. cause: connection fault; internal fault.
module ´number´, overflow [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ´number´, is announcing an internal overflow. Possib. cause: power supply fault; connection fault; internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
module ´number´, status fault [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ´number´, is announcing a status fault. Possib. cause: power supply fault; connection fault; internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
module ´number´, system - fault [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ´number´, is announcing an internal system fault. Possib. cause: internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, 24V-supply [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing a faulty 24V-supply. Possib. cause: power supply fault; connection fault.
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, counter fault [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing an internal counter fault. Possib. cause: internal fault.
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, fifo overflow [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing an internal fifo overflow. Possib. cause: internal fault.
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, IO-error [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing a faulty input respectively
output. Possib. cause: internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, life check [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing a life check error between the
module and the BST. Possib. cause: connection fault; internal fault.
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, overflow [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing an internal overflow. Possib. cause: power supply fault; connection fault; internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, status fault [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing a status fault. Possib. cause: power supply fault; connection fault; internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, system - fault [S]Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing an internal system fault. Possib. cause: internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
operating system, system - fault [S]Explanation: internal fault. Possib. cause: Operating system is recognizing a lack of internal ressources.
pawl device, area depart [F]Explanation: The area where pawl device activities are allowed was leaved. This area is normaly equal to the zone of the safety circuit. Possib. cause: check bolt reversal area; check zone switch; check motor; check input "touchdown active" and the the connected switch;
check pawl device mechanics
pawl device, depart overrun area [F]Explanation: The area where a reversal of bolts is allowed was leaved during the reversal. Possib. cause: check area of bolt reversal; check motor
pawl device, li.sw.activ. missing [F]Explanation: At least one of the limit switches "bolts activated" has become inactive after activating the bolt. Possib. cause: check input "Bolt Limit Sw. Deact" and the connected limit switch(es); check bolts
pawl device, li.sw.deactiv. missing [F]Explanation: At least one of the limit switches "bolts deactivated" has become inactive after deactivating the bolts. Possib. cause: check input "Bolt Limit Sw. Activ" and the connected limit switch(es); check bolts
pawl device, limit switch defect [F]Explanation: The inputs "Bolt Limit Sw. Activ" and "Bolt Limit Sw. Deact" had been active at the same time. Possib. cause: check "Bolt Limit Sw. Activ" and "Bolt Limit Sw. Deact" and the connected limit switches.
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Event log entries
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System I – A / 7
pawl device, Motor [F]Explanation: no response from the motor (internal fault). Possib. cause: check motor; check relay-modules; check connections
pawl device, no zone during relev. [F]Explanation: No zone signal was recognized prior to touchdown travel. Possib. cause: check the safety circuit module; magnet switch defect
pawl device, overload monitoring [M]Explanation: The input ´overload´ had become active, after the bolts of the pawl device had been deactivated. Possib. cause: car overloaded; check input ´Overload´ and the connect switch
pawl device, Safety Module [F]Explanation: The safety module announced a fault,during pawl device was active. Possib. cause: check the safety module; magnet switch defect
pawl device, touchdown active [F]Explanation: A downwards travel to the area of bolt reversal couldn´t be exceeded because the input ´touchdown active´ was active. Possib. cause: check input ´touchdown active´ and the connected switch; check area of bolt reversal; check mechanics of the pawl device
pawl device, vRelev > 0.3 m/s [F]Explanation: The upper releveling speed limit is exceeded. Possib. cause: Check releveling speed setting and relevelling speed monitor setting
pawl device, zone fault [F]Explanation: During pawl device activities the lift left the relevelling zone. Possib. cause: check bolt reversal area; check zone switch; check input "touchdown active" and the the connected switch
regulator , stop sig. in travel [F]Explanation: The signal "electrical stop" from the regulator became inactive in travel. Possib. cause: check the regulator
regulator prewarning, has tripped [F]Explanation: The regulator announces a temperature that is less than 10 C under the temperature treshold. Possib. cause: cooling insufficient; regulator overcharged; regulator dimension ist insufficient
regulator, … (see explanation) [F]Explanation: The regulator announces a typal error text. Possib. cause: regulator realize an error; read the regulator manual
regulator, over-speed [F]Explanation: The regulator announces over-speed (1.1 times as much as the nominal travel speed). Possib. cause: Check regulator; Check drive
regulator, stop sig. in slowing [F]Explanation: The signal "electrical stop" from the regulator become inactive before the controller stops the drive. Possib. cause: check regulator
relevelling motor [F]Explanation: The relevelling has not been started or finished. Possib. cause: Check the wiring between motor and the motor extension module.
relevelling, no zone during relev. [M]Explanation: No zone signal was recognized prior to relevelling. Possib. cause: check the safety circuit module; magnet switch defect
relevelling, relev. no. overflow [M]Explanation: The pre-set no. of relevelling attempts at one floor level has been exceeded. Possib. cause: check relevelling attempt setting; oil leak on hydraulic lift
relevelling, Safety Module [F]Explanation: The safety module registered a fault during relevelling. Possib. cause: check the safety module; magnet switch defect
relevelling, time overflow [F]Explanation: Relevelling was not completed within the pre-set time. Possib. cause: check the monitor time setting; lift blocked during relevelling; magent switch defect
relevelling, vRelev > 0.3 m/s [M]Explanation: The upper releveling speed limit is exceeded. Possib. cause: Check releveling speed setting and relevelling speed monitor setting
relevelling, zone fault [F]Explanation: During relevelling the lift left the relevelling zone. Possib. cause: the switching point for relevelling was not recognised; check the shaft relevelling signals; magnet switch defect
remote control fault, function activation [F]Explanation: The activation of a function via remote control has not been taken place. Possib. cause: Check terminal settings; check remote control settings
Remote-fault, Testcall failure [F]Explanation: The function "Testcall", to check the recall settings to the remote control office (VisualLift server), failed. Possib. cause: Check remote control-/modemsettings and "tel.no. Modem PC". Check the connection to the modem- and/or the DLON-
gateway.
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Event log entries
I – A / 8 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System
Remote-Message, Testcall successful [M]Explanation: The function "Testcall", to check the recall settings to the remote control office (VisualLift server), was successful done. Possib. cause: -
safe. circ. in trav., car door open [F]Explanation: The car door was opened during travel. Possib. cause: check car door or door end contacts
safe. circ. in trav., control voltage [F]Explanation: The control voltage supply has been interrupted. If the control voltage
supply returns, the controller restarts automatically. Possib. cause: check power supply of the control
safe. circ. in trav., door open [F]Explanation: A landing door was opened during travel. Possib. cause: doors were opened by the emergency lock release
safe. circ. in trav., emerg. limit switch [F]Explanation: The terminal limit switch has been tripped. Possib. cause: interruption of the passive safety circuit; check the terminal limit switch
safe. circ. in trav., Lock Open [F]Explanation: A lock contact was opened during the travel. Possib. cause: check door lock
safe. circ. in trav., Primary Safety Circ. [F]Explanation: A contact was opened during the travel. Possib. cause: Check all contacts in the primary safety circuit.
safe. circ. in trav.. safe.sirc. pawl dev. [M]Explanation: The input Safe.Circ. Pawl Dev.´ became inaktive during a travel. Possib. cause: check pawl device mechanics; check input ´Safe.Circ. Pawl Dev.´ and the connected switch
safety circ., control voltage [F]Explanation: The control voltage supply has been interrupted. If the control voltage
supply returns, the controller restarts automatically. Possib. cause: check power supply of the control
safety circ., emerg. limit switch [F]Explanation: The terminal limit switch has been interrupted. Possib. cause: interruption of the passive safety circuit
safety circuit, interrupted [F]Explanation: After door closing (satefty circuit is complety closed) and before the motor start sequnece begins one or more of the
contacts U4 until U6 reopens again or temporary interrupted. Possib. cause: check the door closing sequence and/or the door locking; increase the value for the lock bounce timer
safety circuit, Primary Safety Circ. [F]Explanation: A primary safety circuit has been interrupted. Possib. cause: check over-speed governor and similar items
Safety Module, input not active [F]Explanation: The safety module registered a fault. Possib. cause: check the safety module; magnet switch defect
Safety Module, no zone with standing [F]Explanation: No zone signal was recognized while standing at the floor. Possib. cause: check the safety switching module; zone switch defect; check zone signal to the MDSK print; check wiring to the DSK print
Safety Module, preopen & relev. off [F]Explanation: The safety module registered a fault resulting in the door preopen & relevelling features being inhibited. Possib. cause: check the safety module; magnet switch defect
selctor fault, no prelimit top [F]Explanation: The prelimit switch top was not recognized by the controller on travelling up. Possib. cause: Check shaft signals at the upper shaft area; check the deceleration- and count-signals; magnet switch defect
selector fault, APS-Initialisation [F]Explanation: After power on the MPK couldn´t establish a connection to the MAPS-module. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, act. location msg. 1 [S]Explanation: The MAPS-module didn´t supply a valid level information. Possib. cause: encoder defect; encoder wiring faulty; check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, act. location msg. 2 [S]Explanation: The actual level information supplied by the MAPS-module couldn´t be read by the MPK. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, act. location msg. 3 [S]Explanation: Due to insufficient MPK-RAM, there is no MAPS-level information available. Possib. cause: Check program configuration of the MPK; Check hardware of the MPK.
selector fault, APS-Connection [F]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Event log entries
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System I – A / 9
selector fault, APS-Travel Monitor [F]Explanation: The MAPS-Module announces that the car is travelling in the wrong direction. Possib. cause: Check the settings of the motor and inverter.
selector fault, both correct. swit. [F]Explanation: The correction signals at both ends of travel have been recognized at the same time. Possib. cause: check shaft signals in the correction zone; magnet switch defect
selector fault, bottom correct def. [F]Explanation: The bottom correction switch was recognized in up travel at a level which is not the top or bottom floor. Possib. cause: check shaft signals of the bottom correction; magnet switch defect
selector fault, brake without selec. [S]Explanation: internal fault. Possib. cause: Request for slowing down without selecting a target floor level.
selector fault, broadcast overflow [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MDSK- respectively MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MDSK- respectively the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, com.-initialization [S]Explanation: After power on the MPK couldn´t establish a connection to the MAPS-module. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, connect. monitor [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, connection timeout [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, correct bot unexpect. [F]Explanation: The bottom correction switch was recognized too early in down travel due to a counter error. Possib. cause: check shaft signals; check impulse counter; magnet switch defect
selector fault, correct top unexpect. [F]Explanation: The top correction switch was recognized too early in up travel due to a counter error. Possib. cause: check shaft signals; check impulse counter; manget switch defect
selector fault, Counter Adjustment [F]Explanation: The internal counter was re-adjusted when the lift travelled into the destination level. Possib. cause: check shaft signals; check incrementer; check incrementer wiring fault in the incrementer wiring
selector fault, counter overrun [F]Explanation: The internal counter range has been exceeded. Possib. cause: select reduced resolution for incrementer; check polarity of the incrementer signal
selector fault, DCP without MAPS [F]Explanation: The type of selector doesn´t support DCP (MPK4000). Possib. cause: Only the selector typ ´APS´ supports a DCP-connection. If any other type of selector has been choosed DCP-connection
has to be set to ´inactiv´ (MPK4000).
selector fault, DCP-Destinat.-Level [S]Explanation: Only DCP4: The MAPS-Modul renews the remaining distance to the next floor, although the MPK wants to stop at the
actual level. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, DCP-Stop-Level [S]Explanation: Only DCP4: The MPK tries to stop on a level, after the remaining distance has been renewed to the next floor. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, DCP4 without MAPS [F]Explanation: The type of selector doesn´t support DCP4 (MPK400). Possib. cause: Only the selector typ ´APS´ supports a DCP-connection. If any other type of selector has been choosed DCP-connection
has to be set to ´Ziehl-Abegg DCP 3´ or to ´inactiv´ (MPK400).
selector fault, Direction Monitor [F]Explanation: During a travel the MPK is recognizing, that the MAPS-module announces a direction that doesn´t fit to the travel direction. Possib. cause: Check the settings of the motor and inverter.
selector fault, DSK-connection [F]Explanation: Connection to the MDSK print was lost during operation. Possib. cause: Check connections to the MDSK print.
selector fault, DSK-initialisation [F]Explanation: After switching on the control connection could not be made with the MDSK print. Possib. cause: Check connections to the MDSK print check the LED´s on the MDSK print
selector fault, DSK-reset [F]Explanation: The MDSK print reports a RESET. Possib. cause: Check the control supply voltages.
selector fault, encoder defect [F]Explanation: No signal has been recognized from the incrementer. Possib. cause: incrementer defect; wiring fault to the incrementer
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Event log entries
I – A / 10 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System
selector fault, faulty startparamet. [S]Explanation: Travel can´t be started due to missing MDSK- respectively MAPS-modul level informations. Possib. cause: Check if the MDSK- respectively the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, floor no. variation [F]Explanation: The learning journey shows a different no. of stops to the setting. Possib. cause: check no. of stops in the menu "basic settings"; check the zone signal to the MDSK print
selector fault, floor-value wrong [F]Explanation: After a learning journey the floor level values are not in ascending order. Possib. cause: incrementer defect; faults with the incrementer wiring
selector fault, incorrect zone [F]Explanation: A false sequence of zones was recognized during the learning journey. Possib. cause: zone switch defect; check zone signal to the MDSK print; check connections to the MDSK print
selector fault, invalid impuls [S]Explanation: The level information reported during the travel from the MAPS-module is invalid. Possib. cause: encoder defect; encoder wiring faulty; check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, invalid location [S]Explanation: The reported level information from the MAPS-module is invalid. Possib. cause: encoder defect; encoder wiring faulty; check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector Fault, invalid Position [F]Explanation: The absolute encoder is announcing a position, that is out of the range of the learned shaft positions. Possib. cause: replacement of the encoder; adjustment of the encoder without coupling to the lift; faulty encoder
selector fault, learn trav. not valid [F]Explanation: An activated learning journey was not successfully completed. Possib. cause: check settings; severe fault (check the event log)
selector fault, learn. trav. interr. [F]Explanation: An activated learning travel was interrupted. Possib. cause: learning travel was stopped by maintenance personnel severe fault (check the event log)
selector fault, Level Offset Limit [S]Explanation: After a normal stop (in case of DSK or APS) a level offset greater than the Level Offset Limit was measured. Possib. cause: Check drive; check switch-values; check shaft signals; check incrementer;
selector fault, Level Values invalid [F]Explanation: The values of the floor levels are momentary invalid. Possib. cause: the number of floor level has changed since the last learning travel; the values of the floor levels aren´t in a rising order
selector fault, List-FIFO [S]Explanation: Due to insufficient MPK-RAM, the allocation of the APS-FIFOs wasn´t accomplished. Possib. cause: Check program configuration of the MPK; Check hardware of the MPK.
selector fault, load MAPS-program [S]Explanation: The code of the MAPS-program program couldn´t be transfered to the MAPS-module. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, MAPS-broadcast-ovflw [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, MAPS-com.-initial. [S]Explanation: After power on the MAPS-module couldn´t establish a connection to the MPK. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, MAPS-List-FIFO [S]Explanation: Due to insufficient MAPS-RAM, the allocation of the MAPS-FIFOs wasn´t accomplished. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, MAPS-rcv.-overflow [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, MAPS-receive-collis. [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, MAPS-timeout [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, Miscount [F]Explanation: A wrong order of impulses was detected during decellaration. Possib. cause: check impulse-magnets and switches "Up" and "Down"; check zone-magnets and switches; check the setting of impuls
order in the MPK-menue
selector fault, missed DSK-zone [F]Explanation: The zone signal was not recognized by the MDSK print. Possib. cause: zone switch defect; check zone signal to the MDSK print; check wiring to the MDSK print
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Event log entries
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System I – A / 11
selector fault, more than 24/60 floors [F]Explanation: More than 24 / 60 floors have been recognized during the learning travel. Possib. cause: Check the zone signal at the MDSK-module; check the wiring to the MDSK-module.
selector fault, more than 60 levels [F]Explanation: More than 60 floors were recognized during the learning journey. Possib. cause: check the zone signal to the MDSK print; check connections to the MDSK print
selector fault, MPK-timeout [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, no correction above [F]Explanation: The upper correction switch was not recognized due to a counter error during up travel. Possib. cause: check the shaft signals in the upper correction zone; check counter impulses; magnet switch defect
selector fault, no correction below [F]Explanation: The lower correction switch was not recognized due to a counter error during down travel. Possib. cause: check the shaft signals in the lower correction zone; check counter impulses; magnet switch defect
selector fault, no count signal [F]Explanation: No incrementer signals were recognized during learning travel. Possib. cause: check wiring to the MDSK print; check polarity of the incrementer signals
selector fault, no Level Values [F]Explanation: No level values were recognized during the learning travel. Possib. cause: absolute encoder defect; check connections of the absolute encoder
selector fault, no MAPS-loader [S]Explanation: The boot loader program on the MAPS-module is faulty or not present. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, no prelimit bottom [F]Explanation: The prelimit switch bottom was not recognized by the controller on travelling down. Possib. cause: Check shaft signals at the lower shaft area; check the deceleration- and count-signals; magnet switch defect
selector fault, no zone at end floor [F]Explanation: After stopping the lift at an end floor during learning travel the car isn´t standing at the zone. Possib. cause: zone switch defect; zone switch is bouncing; check zone signal to the MDSK print; check wiring to the MDSK print
selector fault, no zone signal [F]Explanation: No zone signal was recognized during the learning travel. Possib. cause: zone switch defect; check zone signal to the MDSK print; check wiring to the MDSK print
selector fault, opposite direc. level [F]Explanation: The level signal of the opposite direction is not available at arrival. Possib. cause: Check impulses, sequence of impulse in the menu of MPK, magnetic switch defect
selector fault, pre. location msg. 1 [S]Explanation: The MAPS-module didn´t supply a valid preliminary level information. Possib. cause: encoder defect; encoder wiring faulty; check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, pre. location msg. 2 [S]Explanation: The actual preliminary level information supplied by the MAPS-module couldn´t be read by the MPK. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, pre. location msg. 3 [S]Explanation: Due to insufficient MPK-RAM, there is no preliminary MAPS-level information available. Possib. cause: Check program configuration of the MPK; Check hardware of the MPK.
selector fault, receive list [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, receive overflow [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, receive-collision [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MDSK- respectively MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MDSK- respectively the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, reset requested [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, send list [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, speed-monitoring [F]Explanation: DCP4-speed-monitoring at upper or lower floor has triggered. Possib. cause: Check regulator set-up; Check switch S19 ´Speed-Monitoring´; Check drive
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Event log entries
I – A / 12 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System
selector fault, start monitor [F]Explanation: The incrementer rotation direction monitor was triggered. Possib. cause: check setting of drive and regulator
selector fault, top correct. defect [F]Explanation: The top correction switch was recognized in down travel at a level which is not the top or bottom floor. Possib. cause: check shaft signals of the top correction; magnet switch defect
selector fault, travel hight change [F]Explanation: The travel hight has changed by more than one meter without a new learning journey. Possib. cause: Setting of the travel hight has been changed.
selector fault, travel hight wrong [F]Explanation: The travel hight has not been set. Possib. cause: Check setting of travel distance in menu "basic settings".
selector fault, write DPRAM [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MDSK- respectively MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MDSK- respectively the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, write MAPS-DPRAM [S]Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off. Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, zone no. search [F]Explanation: During the learning journey a wrong swquence of zones was recognized. Possib. cause: zone switch defect; check zone signal to the MDSK print check wiring to the MDSK print
SLON-module, 24V-supply [F]Explanation: No 24V-power supply for a module in the SLON-net. Possib. cause: Check the power supply connection to the module.
slowdown monitoring, input not active [F]Explanation: The slowdown monitoring module registered a fault. Possib. cause: Check slowdown monitor module; Check regulator set-up; Check drive; Check selector informations
Stuck Button Detect, Car Calls [F]Explanation: The terminal for car calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V. Possib. cause: Shorted input-terminal (at 24V) or the button has been stuck
Stuck Button Detect, Down Call [F]Explanation: The terminal for down calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V. Possib. cause: Shorted input-terminal (at 24V) or the button has been stuck
Stuck Button Detect, Emergency Travel [F]Explanation: The terminal for emergency travel calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V. Possib. cause: Shorted input-terminal (at 24V) or the button has been stuck
Stuck Button Detect, Ext.L.Calls Dn [F]Explanation: The terminal for extended down calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V. Possib. cause: Shorted input-terminal (at 24V) or the button has been stuck
Stuck Button Detect, Ext.L.Calls Up [F]Explanation: The terminal for extended up calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V. Possib. cause: Shorted input-terminal (at 24V) or the button has been stuck
Stuck Button Detect, Prio. Call [F]Explanation: The terminal for priority calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V. Possib. cause: Shorted input-terminal (at 24V) or the button has been stuck
Stuck Button Detect, Up Call [F]Explanation: The terminal for up calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V. Possib. cause: Shorted input-terminal (at 24V) or the button has been stuck
Stuck Button Detect, VIP Travel [F]Explanation: The terminal for VIP Travel calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V. Possib. cause: Shorted input-terminal (at 24V) or the button has been stuck
system-fault, faulty components [F]Explanation: Wrong controler components. Possib. cause: Use only components with the same producer-no.(BST-LPK´s, Network-modules).
thermistor (motor), has tripped [F]Explanation: The motor thermistor has tripped. Possib. cause: motor overheated
time out, brake monitoring [F]Explanation: The terminal of the brake monitoring hass been activated. Possib. cause: Check the brake and the contacts of the brake monitoring system
time out, door monitor [F]Explanation: The time out of the door monitoring has been reached. Possib. cause: Check the 2nd door contact; check the settings for the door monitoring time out
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Event log entries
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System I – A / 13
time out, remote-connection [F]Explanation: The remote-connection has been interrupted. Possib. cause: Check the remote settings at the MPK; check the terminals and the wiring at the remote PC and at the MPK.
timed out, bolt activating [F]Explanation: The limit switch position ´Bolt Limit Sw. Activ´ wasn´t reached in the designated time. Possib. cause: check the setting of the designated time; check bolts; check input ´Bolt Limit Sw. Activ´ and the connected switch(es)
timed out, bolt deactivating [F]Explanation: The limit switch position ´Bolt Limit Sw. Deact´ wasn´t reached in the designated time. Possib. cause: check the setting of the designated time; check bolts; check input ´Bolt Limit Sw. Deact´ and the connected switch(es)
timed out, Deceleration time monitor [F]Explanation: The set decelleration time has been exceeded. Possib. cause: check floor level switch impulses; check monitor time setting; magnet switch defect
timed out, FKF-Monitor [F]Explanation: No FKF- module is identified in the SLON-net. Possib. cause: Module is not available; power supply fault; connection fault; program version fault
timed out, inverter enable [F]Explanation: The signal "inverter enable" was not identified in the check time. The signal "inverter enable" was cut off in travel or re-
levelling. Possib. cause: Check inverter, check signal-connection to the inverter.
timed out, Regulator Connection [F]Explanation: The serial connection between MPK and the regulator had or has been cut off. Possib. cause: Regulator has been turned off; faulty or non-present data line beetween MPK and the regulator; exchange terminal link 87
and terminal link 88; check the shielding of the chopper power supply; check the shielding of the data line; check the shielding of the motor power supply; faulty regulator hardware; faulty MPK hardware; faulty MAPS hardware
timed out, regulator fault [F]Explanation: The supervisory contact of the regulator has tripped. Possib. cause: check setting of the regulator
timed out, runing time monitor [F]Explanation: The set running time has been exceeded. Possib. cause: check monitor time setting; magnet switch defect
timed out, safety photocell [F]Explanation: The supervision of the saftey photocell was active at the start of travel. Possib. cause: Saftey photocell is defect or blocked.
timed out, start time monitor [F]Explanation: The set starting time has been exceeded. Possib. cause: check monitor time setting; check floor level switch impulses; level impulses set too long; magnet switch defect
timed out, Stop Sig aft. Arriv. [F]Explanation: The signal "electrical stop" from the regulator did not become inactive after arrival during the set time. Possib. cause: check regulator
timed out, stop sig. at level [F]Explanation: The signal "electrical stop" from the regulator became active when stationary. Possib. cause: check the regulator
timed out, stop sig. in slowing [F]Explanation: The signal "electrical stop" from the regulator become inactive before the controller stops the drive. Possib. cause: check regulator
timed out, stop sig. in travel [F]Explanation: The signal "electrical stop" from the regulator became inactive in travel. Possib. cause: check the regulator
timed out, trav. bolt activatio [F]Explanation: The bolt reversal area to activate the bolts of the pawl device wasn´t reached in the designated time. Possib. cause: check the setting of the designated time; check motor; check pawl device mechanics;
timed out, trav. bolt deactivat [F]Explanation: The bolt reversal area to deactivate the bolts of the pawl device wasn´t reached in the designated time. Possib. cause: check the setting of the designated time; check motor; check pawl device mechanics;
timed out, trav. low pressure [F]Explanation: The low pressure equalization of the pawl device wasn´t completeted in the designated time. Possib. cause: check the setting of the designated time; check motor; check pawl device mechanics; check input ´Low Press. Pawl Dev.´
and the connected switch
timed out, trav. safe.circ. pawl dev. [M]Explanation: The input ´Safe.Circ. Pawl Dev.´ didn´t become active within one second after the bolts were deactiveted. Possib. cause: check pawl device mechanics; check input ´Safe.Circ. Pawl Dev.´ and the connected switch
timed out, trav. touchdown area [F]Explanation: The touch down area of the pawl device wasn´t reached in the designated time. Possib. cause: check the setting of the designated time; check motor; check pawl device mechanics; check input ´Touchdown active´ and
the connected switch
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Event log entries
I – A / 14 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System
timed out, travel lock [F]Explanation: The start of travel was blocked for more then 30 secounds. Possib. cause: -
travel interrupted, travel lock [F]Explanation: The input "travel lock" was identified while the travel. Possib. cause: Another lift ignored the travel lock.
voltage monitoring, controller +24V [M]Explanation: The processor +24V supply has been interrupted. Possib. cause: check the control voltage supply to the micro-processor
voltage monitoring, light voltage [M]Explanation: The supervision of the light voltage is active. Possib. cause: Check the power supply of the light voltage.
voltage monitoring, main current activ [M]Explanation: The supervision of the main current announces the return of the main current after an previous loss of it. Possib. cause: -
voltage monitoring, main current deactiv [M]Explanation: The supervision of the main current announces the loss of the main current. Possib. cause: Check power supply of the main circuit.
voltage monitoring, motor signals [M]Explanation: The output motor signals supply to the drive extension module has been interrupted. Possib. cause: check the control voltage supply to the drive extension module; check the wiring
voltage monitoring, Outp. Overl. A1 - A8 [M]Explanation: The power supply for the output has been interrupted. Possib. cause: short circuit in the 24V supply; check shaft wiring
voltage monitoring, short circ. term. 200 [M]Explanation: The controller voltage monitor has tripped. Possib. cause: short circuit in the 24V supply; check shaft wiring
voltage monitoring, short circ. term. 201 [M]Explanation: The voltage monitor of the car has tripped. Possib. cause: short circuit in the 24V supply; check shaft wiring
voltage monitoring, short circ. term. 207 [M]Explanation: The voltage monitor of the calls or output terminals has tripped. Possib. cause: short circuit in the 24V supply; check shaft wiring
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Operation status
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / do_db_an_anh_bz_katalog_gb I – B / 1
active for em. power Explanation: The lift remains in service on emergency power
appl. loader Explanation: Softwareupdate for the modules is active.
at bottom floor Explanation: Indication that a hydraulic lift is at the home landing.
at check floor Explanation: The lift has reached a check floor. A journey to check floor is only initiated when input "shutdown light off" is set.
at em. power floor Explanation: The pre-set emergency power floor has been reached.
At fire evacu. floor Explanation: The pre-set fire evacu. floor has been reached.
at homing floor Explanation: The lift has reached the homing floor. A journey to a homing floor is only initiated when the input "shutdown light off" is set.
at parking floor Explanation: Arrival at the parking floor is indicated.
at readiness floor Explanation: The lift has reached the designated readiness floor.
Attendant Operator Explanation: The lift is operating under the control of an attendant.
autom. function test Explanation: The function tests are running.
bed trav. car Explanation: The lift is handling a bed transport car call.
bed trav. landing Explanation: The lift is handling a bed transport landing call.
BLOCKED Explanation: Due to a major fault operation of the lift is blocked.
bottom floor return Explanation: The homing journey for a hydraulic lift has been initiated.
car calls blocking Explanation: All car calls are blocked because of the activated input ´car calls blocking´.
card-fault Explanation: The abscence or failure of a print has been detected.
cold weather start Explanation: The cold weather operation is active. (only hydr. lift)
construction operation Explanation: The construction operation is active.
contactor monitor Explanation: The contactor monitor has tripped.
control voltage Explanation: The control voltage of the safety circuit is missing.
correction travel Explanation: Due to missing or false floor information a correction travel is initiated.
door blocking Explanation: The setting "service operation doors closed" is activated. Door reversal is inhibited.
door commission Explanation: The door commission sets the location for the DLON-Reader-R/F-modules.
door hold time runs Explanation: The door hold time runs.
doors closing Explanation: The lift waits for the doors to close prior to down travel.
Down Peak Traffic Explanation: The traffic pattern down peak is active.
emer. bottom floor ret. Explanation: The hydr. lift drives to the bottom floor and switched off at the bottom floor. (Cause: critical fault)
emerg. limit switch Explanation: The contact of the upper terminal limit switch has been operated (monitored only on hydraulic lifts). The passive safety circuit is
interrupted.
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Operation status
I – B / 2 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / do_db_an_anh_bz_katalog_gb
emerg. power contr. Explanation: The emergency power control is active.
emerg. stop active Explanation: An emergency stop has been operated.
emergency travel Explanation: Emergency travel is active.
emergency travel floor reached Explanation: The emergency travel floor has been reached.
fire detector active Explanation: At least one fire detector input is active.
fire evacu. service Explanation: The fire evacu. service is active.
firemans control int. Explanation: Lift in use by the fire service. Only car calls are available.
firemans control out Explanation: The lift has been recalled to the preset firemans recall floor.
FKF-monitor Explanation: The connection to the car module (FKF) is interrupted (SLON).
floor commission Explanation: The floor commission is active. It sets the location of the floor modules.
Focal Point Travel Explanation: The car starts the travel to the focal point, detected by traffic pattern with traffic analysis.
fulload Explanation: The load weighting system signals a fully loaded car.
function activation Explanation: A remote control function is active, e.g. remote control for connection superv.
inspection operation Explanation: The inspection operation is active.
land. infrared act. Explanation: The operation of the lobby monitor is indicated.
landing control off Explanation: The lift has been isolated from landing calls.
learn trav. is active Explanation: A learning travel has been initiated.
learn trav. not valid Explanation: The controller has no valid shaft information und remains blocked until a learning travel is initiated.
learning operation Explanation: The manual APS learning operation is active.
lift ready to travel Explanation: There are no travel commands in the system at present.
LRV contact inactive Explanation: The regulator supersisory contact has tripped.
maintenance Explanation: The free progr. input "maintenance" is active and/or in the menue Testing/Maintenance, Presetting the function ´save events´ has
the value ´NO´.
minimum load Explanation: The load weighting system signals minimum load in the car.
modem fault Explanation: The modem operation is troubled. See event log entry.
MPKEasy is active Explanation: MPKEasy sends parameter to the controller.
no selector position Explanation: At this time the controller has no floor level information. A correction journey is required prior to the next command being
answered.
nudging Explanation: An odligatory doors close signal has been activated.
overload Explanation: The load weighting system signals a overloaded car.
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Operation status
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / do_db_an_anh_bz_katalog_gb I – B / 3
parking timer runs Explanation: The pre-set parking timer is running.
parking travel Explanation: The lift is travelling to the parking floor.
photocell blocked Explanation: The photocell has become blocked in down travel.
power save mode Explanation: During "power safe mode" the lift only travels with the speeds v1 resp. v0.
Primary Safety Circ. Explanation: The primary safety circuit is interrupted.
priority trav. land. Explanation: The lift is handling a landing priority call.
priority travel car Explanation: The lift ist handling a car priority call.
random call Explanation: the random cal programme is active.
readiness service Explanation: The readiness service has been initiated.
Regulator Connection Explanation: The serial data link to the regulator is cut off.
regulator fault Explanation: The supervisory contact of the regulator has tripped.
regulator prewarning Explanation: The regulator informs the controller about a critical module temperature. (only DCP-connection)
relevelling Explanation: Relevelling is active.
remote control fault Explanation: The remote control connection to the office is disconnected.
remote set-up Explanation: The remote set-up is activated via remote control. The set-up via menu is not possible.
return to group Explanation: The lift returns to the group after a fault.
safety circuit Explanation: The control voltage of the safety circuit is interrupted.
safety circuit Explanation: The safety circuit has tripped.
safety photocell Explanation: The safety photocell has tripped.
Shutdown Light Off Explanation: The lift service has been switched off and will become non-operational when at the designated floor.
test panel control operation Explanation: The test panel control operation is active.
thermistor Explanation: Overheating of the drive system or hydraulic oil has been registered.
touchdown Explanation: Touchdown is active.
travel interrupt Explanation: Travel terminates at the next landing due to special circumstances (i.e. priority travel,landing call isolation, etc.)
travel lock Explanation: The input "travel lock input" is active.
travel to level: (no.) Explanation: Normal command processing takes place. The next destination is indicated.
Up Peak Traffic Explanation: The traffic pattern up peak is active.
VIP floor reached Explanation: The VIP floor has been reached.
VIP travel Explanation: VIP travel is active.
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Operation status
I – B / 4 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-05-22 / do_db_an_anh_bz_katalog_gb
voltage monitoring Explanation: The procesor voltage monitor has tripped.
waiting for car call Explanation: After operation of the emergency stop or interruptions to the safety photocell the lift waits for a car call to initiate release to travel.
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Functionlist
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH KOLLMORGEN (UK) Ltd.
Broichstrasse 32 Unit 17, St. Asaph Business Park
D-51109 Cologne St. Asaph, Denbighshire LL17OLJ
Telefon +49 (0) 221 89 85 0 United Kingdom
Telefax +49 (0) 221 89 85 30 Telephone 0044-1745-585558
http://www.kollmorgen.de Fax 0044-1745-585828
Email [email protected] Email [email protected]
© KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 04-10-29 / DO_FV4DHK_GB.DOC
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Functionlist
Contents
1 Function list......................................................................................................................................................................................................................3 1.1 General notice to the systems MPK 40 / 400 / 4000........................................................................................................................................................................3 1.2 Description of the notices in the function lists...............................................................................................................................................................................3
2 Indicator modules ............................................................................................................................................................................................................4 2.1 Selfdefined indicators .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................5
3 Short floor distances .......................................................................................................................................................................................................6 4 Ring control emergency power drive.............................................................................................................................................................................6 5 Parking floor external: time intervals ............................................................................................................................................................................6 6 Door blocking: time intervals .........................................................................................................................................................................................7 7 Traffic pattern: time intervals .........................................................................................................................................................................................7 8 Remote control.................................................................................................................................................................................................................7 9 Selective user control......................................................................................................................................................................................................8 10 Special travels ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................9 11 Code numbers ................................................................................................................................................................................................................10
04-10-29 II / 2
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Functionlist
1 Function list 1.1 General notice to the systems MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
The chapter 1 contents all functions of MPK 4-serie and there max. values.
The number of functions und the available values are different by the systems MPK 40, MPK 400 and MPK 4000!
You find the functions of MPK 40, 400 and 4000 in the lists at the end of this dokumentation.
1.2 Description of the notices in the function lists
[1] With setting traction an immediate blocking occurs [2] Only autom. doors with limit switches / swing doors with limit switches [3] Only autom. doors without limit switches / swing doors without limit switches / swing doors without car doors [4]
Only with group-interface.
[5] Only without group-interface.[6] Only considered by „fire evacuation service “ or „readine. trav.“ with free programmable input. [7] The value for the distance of the reference-point will be corrected after the learning travel (cause: encoder-resolution). [8] DSK: The value for the relevelling-points will be corrected after the learning travel (cause: encoder-resolution). [9] From prg. Version LIFT4h1.28: 3 doorsides available (MPK400)
04-10-29 II / 3
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Functionlist
2 Indicator modules Module
Display Location
selfdefined Binary 1 to N Additional Graycode Invert. Graycode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ... E 1 2 3 4 5 6 ... U E 1 2 3 4 5 ... K E 0 1 2 3 4 ... K E 1 2 3 4 5 .... U2 U1 E 1 2 3 ... -1 0 1 2 3 4 ... - 1 1 2 3 4 5 ... -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 ... -2 -1 1 2 3 4 5 ... P 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...
04-10-29 II / 4
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Functionlist
2.1 Selfdefined indicators Module: Location:
Floor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14Display
Code
Floor 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28Display
Code
Floor 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42Display
Code
Floor 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56Display
Code
04-10-29 II / 5
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Functionlist
3 Short floor distances Start speed for travel to the next floor
From floor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27To floor 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
V fast with normal impuls V intermed. with intemed. impuls V slow without additional impuls
From floor 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55To floor 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
V fast with normal impuls V intermed. with intemed. impuls V slow without additional impuls
4 Ring control emergency power drive Example: sequence of the emergency power drive:
Lift-No. 2, Lift-No. 4, Lift-No.8 , Lift-No.7 , Lift-No.6 , Lift-No.5 , Lift-No.1 , Lift-No. 3
Sequence 1. Lift 2. Lift 3. Lift 4. Lift 5. Lift 6. Lift 7. Lift 8. Lift
Group-/Lift-No. 2 4 8 7 6 5 1 3
5 Parking floor external: time intervals Example: The floor 6 is from 1145 am to 1215 pm the actual parking floor.
Interval - number Floor ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm) 1 6 11:45 12:15
04-10-29 II / 6
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Functionlist
6 Door blocking: time intervals Example: On floor 1 is the first door side blocked from 001 am to 525 am and from 1200 am to 1330 pm. Door side 1 Door side 2 Interval 1 Interval 2 Interval 1 Interval 2
Floor ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm) ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm) ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm) ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm) 1 00:01 05:25 12:00 13:30
7 Traffic pattern: time intervals Example: From 0715 am to 0800 am is the function ”time interval up peak” active; from 1155 am to 1215 pm is the function ”time interval down peak” active.
Time interval up peak Time interval down peak
Interval – Number ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm) ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm) 1 07:15 08:00 11:55 12:15
8 Remote control Number of
digits Type of char. Default setup Setup
remote control ID 7 0..9 A..Z Empty
RM-telephone no. 20 0..9, space Empty
modem configuration 20 0..9 A..Z, space special char. T 0
modem basic configuration 20 0..9 A..Z, space special char. X3
* Select konfiguration according to your modemmanual
Example: Setup
remote control ID AF77029
RM-telephone no. 07221 2011
modem configuration T 0
modem basic configuration X3 S0=0
04-10-29 II / 7
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Functionlist
9 Selective user control Door side 1 Door side 2 Door side 3
Floor Usergroup 1
User group 2
User group 3
User group 4
User group 1
User group 2
User group 3
User group 4
User group 1
User group 2
User group 3
User group 4
Notice: The pre-setting on every level and on every door side is ”inactive”.
You can choose only one user group for a level /door side. The activation of the selective user control requires the minimum of one entry of a user group to one door side or floor.
04-10-29 II / 8
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Functionlist
10 Special travels Floors Doors
All values Standard setup Setup Door 1 & 2 Door 1 Door 2 Door 3
Readiness floor (with free progr. input) 1 ... n 1 X *
Fire evacuation floor (with free progr. input) 1 ... n 1 X *
2. Fire evacuation floor (with free progr. input) Inactive, 1 ... n Inactive X *
Fire fighting floor 1 ... n 1 X *
Emergency power floor Next floor, 1 ... n Next floor X *
Survey floor Inactive, 1 ... n Inactive X *
* preset (only by one door sides)
Notice: The suppositions for the selection of a door side are:
- the foor setting is ”selective doors” (main menue: ”basic setting” ->”door entr.”)
- 2 door sides exist at the floor
You can´t change the setting for the door, if:
- only 1 door side exists
- opposite doors and both doors are existing at the floor
- a door is blocked at the floor Example: Readiness floor: floor 2 and door 2 opens on arrival (only available by „selektive doors” at this floor).
Fire evacuation floor: floor 2 and doors 1 & 2 open on arrival fire fighting floor: floor 2 and doors 1 & 2 open on arrival emergency power floor: next floor and door 1 opens on arrival
Floors Doors
All values Standard setup Setup Door 1 & 2 Door 1 Door 2 Door 3
Readiness floor (with free progr. input) 1 ... n 1 2 X
Fire evacuation floor (with free progr. Input) 1 ... n 1 2 X
Fire fighting floor 1 ... n 1 2 X
Emergency power floor Next floor, 1 ... n Next floor Next floor X
04-10-29 II / 9
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Functionlist
11 Code numbers
Lift No. / Code
Lift
Company
Location
Control Number
Name Date
Code No. : set
Code No. : modified
Code No. : modified Code No. : modified Code No. : modified Code No. : modified
Attention ! Important document ! Not to be left in the controller Return data sheet with code numbers to the service department
1. Code-No. 2. Code-No. 3. Code-No. 1. Code-No. 2. Code-No. 3. Code-No. Tech. engineer 1 Serv. engineer 2 Tech. engineer 2 Remote interr.e Serv. engineer 1 Service-office
04-10-29 II / 10
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 1
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values information operation status 1.00 - - - -
information, event log display 1.00 - - - -
information, event log clear 1.00 - - - -
information, event log print 1.00 - - - -
information, event log current event print 1.00 - - - -
information, event log display system 1.00 - - - -
information, event log clear system 1.00 - - - -
information parameter print 1.00 - - - -
information, test module BST-IOs 1.00 - - - -
information, test module net-IOs 1.00 - - - -
information BST-res. outp. term. 1.00 - - - -
information BST-res. input term. 1.00 - - - -
information net-terminal-setup 1.00 - - - -
information module list 1.00 - - - -
information parking zone plan 1.00 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics stop position 3.16 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics stop position 3.16 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics resolution 3.22 - - - -
information group members 1.00 - - - -
information, network diagnosis trouble 1.00 - - - -
information, network diagnosis comunication flow 1.00 - - - -
information, transponder/reader test key 3.02 - - - -
information, transponder/reader active command 3.02 - - - -
information, remote monitoring Installation-ID 4.00 - - - -
information, trip counter display 1.00 - - - -
information, trip counter clear 1.00 - - - -
information, trip counter intervall 1.00 - - 0 0...999.999.999
information, running time counter display 1.00 - - - -
information, running time counter clear 1.00 - - - -
information, running time counter interval 1.00 - - 0 h 0 h....60.000 h
information, lift / control no. set controller no. 1.00 - - - -
information, lift / control no. clear controller no. 1.00 - - - -
information, lift / control no. set lift no. 1.00 - - - -
information, lift / control no. clear lift no. 1.00 - - - -
information date/time display 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. lift ... 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. operating system 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. menu program 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. MAPS-modul 2.23 - - - -
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 2
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values information, version no. DSC programm 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. modulesoftware 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. Transponder/Reader 1.00 - - - -
see/give calls floor 1 - ... 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls, simulated call program car calls 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls, simulated call program landing calls up 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls, simulated call program landing calls down 1.00 S - - -
code no. user log off 1.00 - - - -
code no. user log on 1.00 - - - -
code no. user identity 1.00 - - - -
code no. edit 1.00 - - - -
code no. automatic user log off 1.00 S - yes yes,no
basic settings, lift no. of stops 1.00 R 1 2 2 - 56 stops
basic settings, lift lowest floor 1.00 R 1 1 1- (no. of stops-1)
basic settings, lift no. of car doors 1.00 R 1 1 1, 2
basic settings, lift table of entrances 1.00 R - autom. with limit sw./syncronised doors
(autom. w./without limit sw., swing doors with/witho. car door, no door),(syncronised doors, selective doors, sequential door op.)
basic settings, lift type of selector 1.00 R - horizontal selector horizontal selector, vertical selector, digital selector, APS/autom. learn. trav. (2.05), APS/man. learn. operat. (2.05), simple shaft copier (2.10)
basic settings, lift drive type 1.00 R - hydraulic hydraulic, variable freq. AC, AC-unregulated (2.11), hydr. variable freq. (2.21)
basic settings, lift serial motor link 3.01 R - inactive inactive, DCP3, DCP4
basic settings, lift group- lift-no. 1.00 R 1 1 1...8
basic settings, MPK-control landing calls 1-8 BST 1.00 R - no yes, no
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, active for em. power 1.00 R - -* E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, APS-learn. op. act. 2.05 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, APS-learn. op. level 2.05 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, landing conrol off 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, user control deact. 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, readiness service 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, readin. service 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fire evacuation 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fire evacuation service 1.11 R - -* E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fire detector 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, brake monitoring 1 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, brake monitoring 2 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, level down 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, level up 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, leveltest 2.18 R - - E7 - E16
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 3
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, press. contact do.[9] 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, open limit sw. do. [9] 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, close limit sw. do. [9] 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, travel lock input 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, remote switch group 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, firefight. ctrl. ext. 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, firefight. ctrl. int. 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
Basic Settings, MPK-control BST-input, allow emerg. trav car 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, VIP tavel ena. int. 1.25 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, speed-monitoring 3.12 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, impulse down 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, impulse up 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, inspection 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, inspection travel down 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, inspection travel up 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, car empty/user 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fan push button 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, correction top 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, correction bottom 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, photocell do. [9] 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, light voltage 1.00 R - -* E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, minimum load 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, releveling sw. down 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, releveling sw. up 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, emerg. travel cancel 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, alarm 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, emerg. power contr. 1.00 R - -* E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, emer. power travel 1.00 R - -* E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, parking external 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, regul. remote set-up 3.08 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, start-direction emerg. pow. rel. 2.31 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, call block 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, detect. edge open do. [9] 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, detect. edge stop do. [9] 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, safety photocell 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Shutdown Light Off 1.00 R - -* E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, do. open push do. [9] 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, door hold push do. [9] 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, do. close push do. [9] 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 4
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, grpsplit land. calls 3.21 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, grpsplit prio. calls 3.21 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, grpsplit ext.lndcall 3.21 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, up peak traffic 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, down peak traffic 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, door monitor 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, overload 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, universal input 1 1.07 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, universal input 2 1.07 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, universal input 3 1.07 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, universal input 4 1.07 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, universal input 5 1.07 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, universal input 6 1.07 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, universal input 7 1.07 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, universal input 8 1.07 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fulload 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, prelimit switch- top 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, prelimit switch-bot 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, landing superv. ctrl. do.[9] 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, VIP travel cancel 1.25 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, priority travel car 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, maintenance 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, maintenance door blocking 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, cold weather start 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, zone switch S71 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, zone switch S72 1.00 R - - E7 - E16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, down-arrow 1.00 R - - A2- A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 1 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 10 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 11 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 12 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 13 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 14 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 15 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 16 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 2 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 3 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 4 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 5 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 5
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 6 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 7 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 8 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 9 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, APS-learn. op. ack. 2.05 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, APS-learn. trav. valid 2.05 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, APS-zone output 2.05 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, up-arrow 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out readiness service 1.29 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out fire evacuation service 1.29 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Fire Detector 2.28 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Outp. Remote Command 3.14 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out emerg. power serv. 1.29 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out of service 1.00 R - -* A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, at readin. serv. fl. 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, in-use-light 1.00 R - -* A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-Output, at fire evacuation floor 1.00 R - -* A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, level output 2.07 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, passing signal 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, travel 3.08 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, travel lock output 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, travel requirement 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, firefight fl. reach. 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Speed v0 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, car gong 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, car movement 2.15 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, fan output 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, motor thermistor 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, oil thermistor 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, overall hold time 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, journey time monitor 1.11 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, motor ventilation 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, relevelling 1.26 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, relev./decellerate 1.04 R - -* A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, emergency travel 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, em. trav. fl. reached 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, at em. power floor 1.00 R - -* A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, emer. pow. sequence 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, no selector position 1.11 R - - A2 - A16
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 6
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, accept, user group 1 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, accept, user group 2 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, accept, user group 3 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, accept, user group 4 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, accep. do. hold do. [9] 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, reset-sequ. compl. 2.07 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Retiring Cam 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, coll. fault registr. 1.00 - - -* A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, signal attendant op. 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Shutdown Light Off 1.00 R - -* A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, door fault message 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, test alarm button 1.24 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, test butt. door open 1.24 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, do. cntr. open do. [9] 1.00 R - -* A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, do. cntr. close do. [9] 1.00 R - -* A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, doors close command 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, door fault opening 1.11 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, door fault closing 1.11 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, bridge S10 1.00 R - -* A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, overload 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, universal output 1 1.07 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, universal output 2 1.07 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, universal output 3 1.07 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, universal output 4 1.07 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, universal output 5 1.07 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, universal output 6 1.07 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, universal output 7 1.07 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, universal output 8 1.08 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, valve control 1.01 R - -* A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, fulload 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, VIP floor reached 1.25 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, VIP travel 1.25 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, priority 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, overall priority 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, v-fast 1.26 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, hall latern down 3.08 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, hall latern up 3.08 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, nudging sig.do. [9] 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, nudging. do.[9] 1.00 R - - A2 - A16
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 7
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values basic settings, MPK-control net-input, active for em. power 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, APS-learn. op. active 2.05 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, APS-learn. op. level 2.05 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, landing control off 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, user control deact. 1.09 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, readin. serv. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, readine. trav. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, fire evacuation 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, fire evacu. service 1.11 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, fire detector 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, brake monitoring 1 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, brake monitoring 2 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, level down 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, level up 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, level test 2.18 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, press contact do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, open limit sw. do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, close limit sw. do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, travel lock input 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, remote switch group 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, firefight. ctrl. ext. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, firefight. ctrl. int. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, allow emerg. trav car 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, VIP travel ena. int. 1.25 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, speed-monitoring 3.12 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, impulse down 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, impulse up 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, inspection 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, inspect. travel down 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, inspection travel up 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, car empty 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, fan push button 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, correction top 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, correction bottom 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, photocell do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, light voltage 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, minimum load 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, releveling sw. down 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, releveling sw. up 1.00 R - - -
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 8
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values basic settings, MPK-control net-input, VIP travel cancel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, alarm 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, emerg. power contr. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, emer. power travel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, parking external 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, regul. remote set-up 3.08 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, start-direction emerg. pow. rel. 2.31 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, call block 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, detect. edge open do. [9] 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, detect. edge stop do. [9] 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, safety photocell 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Shutdown Light Off 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, do. open push do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, do. hold push do. [9] 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, do. close push do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, grpsplit land. calls 3.21 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, grpsplit prio. calls 3.21 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, grpsplit ext.lndcall 3.21 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, up peak traffic 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, down peak traffic 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, door monitor 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, overload 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, universal input 1 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, universal input 2 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, universal input 3 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, universal input 4 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, universal input 5 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, universal input 6 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, universal input 7 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, universal input 8 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, fulload 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, prelimit switch-top 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, prelimit switch- bot 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, landing superv. ctrl. do. [9] 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, VIP travel cancel 1.25 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, priority travel car 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, maintenance 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, door blocking 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, dold weather start 1.00 R - - -
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 9
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values basic settings, MPK-control net-input, zone switch S71 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, zone switch S72 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, down-arrow 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 1 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 10 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 11 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segement 12 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 13 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 14 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 15 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 16 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 2 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 3 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 4 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 5 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 6 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 7 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 8 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 9 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, APS-learn. trav. valid 2.05 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, zone output 2.05 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, APS-learn. op. ack. 2.05 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, up-arrow 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car here 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out readin. service 1.29 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out fire evac. serv. 1.29 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fire detector 2.28 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Outp. Remote Command 3.14 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out emerg. power serv. 1.29 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, extern. gong 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out of service 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, at readin. serv. fl. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, in-use-light 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, at fire evacu. floor 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, level output 2.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, passing signal 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, travel lock output 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, travel requirement 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fire fight fl. reach. 1.00 R - - -
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 10
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Speed v0 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car gong 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car movement 2.15 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fan output 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, PTC output (motor) 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, oil thermistor 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, overall hold time 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, journey time monitor 1.11 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, motor ventilation 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, relevelling 1.26 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, relev./decellerate 1.04 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, emergency travel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, em. trav. fl. reached 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, at em. power floor 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, emer. pow. sequence 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, no selector position 1.11 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, accept user group 1 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, accept user group 2 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, accept user group 3 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, accept user group 4 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, accept, do. hold do. [9] 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, reset-sequ. compl. 2.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Retiring Cam 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, coll. fault registr. 1.00 - - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, signal attendant op. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, block indc. 2.32 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Shutdown Light Off 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, door fault message 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, test alarm button 1.24 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, test door open butt. 1.24 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, do. contr. open do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, do. contr. close do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, doors close command 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, door fault opening 1.11 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, door fault closing 1.11 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, overload 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, universal output 1 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, universal output 2 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, universal output 3 1.07 R - - -
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 11
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values basic settings, MPK-control net-output, universal output 4 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, universal output 5 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, universal output 6 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, universal output 7 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, universal output 8 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fulload 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, VIP floor reached 1.25 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, VIP travel 1.25 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, priority 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, overall priority 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, v-fast 1.26 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, hall latern down 3.08 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, hall latern down 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, hall latern up 3.08 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, hall latern up 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, nudging sig. door 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, nudging do. 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, down call 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, up call 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, ext. land. calls down 1.17 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, ext. land. calls up 1.17 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, car call 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, emergency travel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, VIP travel 1.25 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, prio. call 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-term.-release 2.14 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control input bounce timer 1.00 R - 25 ms 25ms, 75ms, 125ms, 175ms, 225 ms
basic settings, MPK-control set time 1.00 S - hh:mm:ss hh:mm:ss
basic settings, MPK-control daylight savingtime 1.00 R - yes yes, no
basic settings, MPK-control display line 1 1.00 S - - 0-9/a-z/A-Z/ special symbols (see function list: normal indicator)
basic settings, MPK-control display line 2 1.00 S - - 0-9/a-z/A-Z/ special symbols (see function list: normal indicator)
basic settings, MPK-control data-interface a 1.00 R - printer/terminal not used, printer/terminal, terminal, MPKEasy, STeP w. modem, STeP wo.modem
basic settings, MPK-control transmission rate a 1.00 R - 9600/8/N/1 19200/8/N/1 (2.14),9600/8/N/1, 4800/8/N/1, 2400/8/N/1, 1200/8/N/1, 600/8/N/1, 300/8/N/1
basic settings, MPK-control data-interface B 1.00 R - MPKEasy not used, printer/terminal, terminal, MPKEasy, STeP w. modem, STeP wo. modem
basic settings, MPK-control transmission rate B 1.00 R - 19200/8/N/1 19200/8/N/1 (2.14), 9600/8/N/1, 4800/8/N/1, 2400/8/N/1, 1200/8/N/1, 600/8/N/1, 300/8/N/1
basic settings, MPK-control language 1.00 R - deutsch deutsch, english, swenska, nederlands, polski, espanol(1.24)
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 12
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values basic settings, MPK-control switch on delay 1.00 R 1 s 2 s ´inactive´ ... 15 s
settings, doors in general door open trigger 1.00 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s ...2,0 s
settings, doors in general Lock Delayed On 1.00 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s...2,0 s
settings, doors in general Lock Bounce Timer 1.00 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s ...2,0 s
settings, doors in general Lock Delayed Off 2.13 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s .... 10,0 s
settings, doors in general Lock Fault Monitor 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general Lock Fault Monitor Delay 1.00 S 1 s 7 s 5 s ...60 s
settings, doors in general at the parking floor 1.00 NF - open and close opened, closed, open and close
settings, doors in general at main parking zone 3.11 NF - open and close opened, closed, open and close
settings, doors in general at homing floor 1.00 NF - open and close opened, closed, open and close
settings, doors in general at bottom floor 3.11 NF - closed opened, closed, open and close
settings, doors in general door nudging 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors in general door nudging after 1.00 NF 1 s 30 s 1 s ... 300 s
settings, doors in general landing superv. ctrl. active 1.00 S 0,1 s 1 s 0 s (2.13) ... 20 s
settings, doors in general Reopen Time 1.00 S 1 s 6 s 1s ...10s/to limit sw.
settings, doors in general door close butt. active 1.00 S 1 s 4 s after ... 5s/limit sw.
Settings, Doors in General Door Reverse to Call 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general pre-opening doors 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors in general firefight ctrl. int. button operat. 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general sequ. door oper. at firemans operat. 1.08 NF - NO yes, no
settings, doors in general door control on inspection 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general loading time 1.00 S 1 s 60 s 10 s ...600 s
settings, doors in general hold time pushed aga. 1.00 NF - restart time cancel time, restart time
settings, doors in general door monitor 1.00 S 10ms ´inactive´ ´inactive´ ... 1000ms
settings, doors in general door monitor acc. to 3.09 S - ´specification EN´ ´specification EN´, ´specificat. sweden´
settings, doors in general photocell monitor 1.00 S 1 min 2 min ´inactive´ ...30 min
settings, doors in general at readin. serv. fl. 1.00 NF - opened opened, open and close
settings, doors in general at fire evacu. floor 1.11 NF - opened opened, open and close
settings, doors in general door push open/close selective 1.26 S - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general opening at start of priority call 2.20 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors in general monitoring v<0,8m/s 3.12 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors side ... further travel delay car calls 1.00 NF 1 s 4 s 1 s ...20 s
settings, doors side ... further travel delay land. calls 1.00 NF 1 s 4 s 1 s ...20 s
settings, doors side ... furth. trav. delay restart by photoc. 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors side ... door to park closed 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors side ... door to park closed 1.00 NF 1 s 15 s 1 s ...45 s
settings, doors side ... door open timed out [2] 1.00 S 1 s 60 s 25 s ... 60 s
settings, doors side ... door close timed out [2] 1.00 S 1 s 60 s inactive ... 60 s
settings, doors side ... door reverse delay 1.00 NF 10 ms 500 ms 50 ms ... 1000 ms
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 13
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values settings, doors side ... Reopen Time at limit switch open [2] 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, doors side ... door motor off at rest [3] 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, doors side ... door motor off at limit switch 2.31 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors side ... door to park closed after [3] 1.00 S 1 s 10 s 1 s ...60 s
settings, indicate / gong display modules 1.00 - - - (see functionlist: indicator modules)
settings, indicate / gong self defined indic. 1.08 NF - - (see functionlist: self defined indicator)
settings, indicate / gong further direction arrow in the car 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong indicators off after ... min 1.00 NF 1 min inactive inactive ...10 min
settings, indicate / gong gong period ...s 1.00 NF 1 s 5 s 1 s ... 10 s
settings, indicate / gong gong on car calls 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong hall lantern flashing 1.00 S - no in travel (1.05), at levelling, no
settings, indicate / gong hall lantern at rest off 1.07 S - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong direction arrows flashing 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong car calls flashing 1.00 S - no undelayed, in travel, at levelling no
settings, indicate / gong landing calls up flashing 1.00 S - no at levelling, yes, no
settings, indicate / gong landing calls down flashing 1.00 S - no at levelling, yes,no
settings, indicate / gong land. prior. calls flashing 1.00 S - no at levelling, yes, no
settings, indicate / gong floor indicators permanently on 1.07 S - no yes, no
settings, control functions control type 1.00 NF - 1 button collective full collective, down collective, 1 button collective, auto push button, FIFO-control
settings, control functions main floor 1.00 NF 1 1 1 ... n
settings, control functions bottom floor return (hydraulic lift) 1.00 NF - on off,on
settings, control functions bott. fl. ret. timer (hydr. lift) 1.00 NF 1 min 15 min 1 min ... 15 min
settings, control functions cold weather start. (hydr. lift) 1.00 S 1 min 30 min 1 min ...60 min
settings, control functions emergency stop 1.00 NF - switch switch, push button, push button swedish
settings, control functions Attendant Operator 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, control functions signal attendant op. duration 1.00 NF 0.1 s 1 s 0.1 s ...60.0 s
settings, control functions car light time delay 1.00 NF 1 s inaktive inaktive ... 300 s
settings, control functions start of fan 1.00 S - with button with button in car, with car movement, w.button or car move (3.14)
settings, control functions fan delay 1.00 S 1 s 30 s 1 s ...300 s
settings, special-travels homing floor 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, 1 ... n
settings, special-travels checkfloor 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, 1 ... n
settings, special-travels readiness service via 1.00 NF - freibelegb. Eingang with progr. input, at all floors
settings, special-travels readiness serv. floor [6] 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: special travels)
settings, special-travels readiness service at 1.00 NF - signal high signal high, signal low
settings, special-travels fire evacuation service via 1.11 NF - with progr. input with progr. input, at all floors, to BSA Leipzig (3.08)
settings, special-travels fire evacuation floor [6] 1.11 NF - - (see functionlist: special travels)
settings, special-travels fire evacuation service at 1.11 NF - low signal (3.11) high signal, low signal
settings, special-travels fire fighting floor 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: special travels)
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 14
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values settings, special-travels fire fight travel specification 1.00 NF - TRA TRA, EN, Sweden, BS, BSA Leipzig (3.08)
settings, special-travels fire fight.travel at 2.31 NF - signal low (3.11) signal high, signal low
settings, special-travels fire detect. serv. at (signal) 1.29 NF - signal low (2.14) signal high, signal low
settings, special-travels emer. power floor ... 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: special travels)
settings, special-travels emerg. power travel via 1.00 NF - free progr. terminal free prog. terminal, ring concept (BUS), star concept (BUS)
settings, special-travels starcontr. em. power d. 1.00 S - - (see functionlist: ring contr. emerg. pow. drive)
settings, special-travels startattempts em. pow 1.00 NF - 1 1 ... 10
settings, special-travels lift during emerg. power 1.00 NF - out of order out of order, in order
settings, special-travels emerg. power at 2.31 NF - signal high signal high, signal low
settings, special-travels on emerg. pow. inmed. to bottom floor (hydraulic lift)
3.02 NF - yes yes, no
settings, special-travels write to event log 2.31 NF - no yes, no
settings, call operation call cancellation direct depend. 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, call operation empty cab. land ctrl. 1.00 NF - next stop next stop, at next car call, at last car call, inactive (1.04)
settings, call operation empty cab. car prio. 1.00 NF - next stop next stop, at next car call, at last car call, inactive (1.01)
settings, call operation empty cab. land prio 1.00 NF - next stop next stop, priority call floor, at next car call, at last car call, at next call
settings, call operation priority-ready 1.00 NF 10 s 30 s 10 s ...3000 s
settings, call operation landing priority flexible [4] 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, call operation more priorities 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, call operation priority sorting 1.00 S - - (see functionlist: priority sorting)
settings, call operation car prio. call via 1.01 NF - key switch key switch, time limit, call limit, call/time limit (1.26), call limit multiple (1.31)
settings, call operation car prio time 1.00 NF 1 s 30 s 1s ...300 s
settings, call operation max car prio. calls 1.00 NF 1 1 1 ...(no. of stops -1)
settings, call operation counter call cancel 1.00 S 1 s inactive inactive ... 10 s
settings, call operation counter call clear 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, call operation car call cancel 1.00 NF 100ms inactive inactive...2000 ms
settings, call operation anti-nuisance 1.00 NF 1 3 1 ...16
settings, call operation selective user ctrl. 1.00 S - - (see functionlist: selective user control)
settings, call operation call signal buffer 1.00 NF 10 ms 40 ms 10 ms ...120 ms
settings, call operation group operation 1.00 S - yes yes, no
settings, call operation traffic pattern 1.00 S - inactive inactive, with progr. input, from times
settings, call operation time interv. up peak 1.00 S - - (see functionlist: traffic pattern)
settings, call operation time interv. dw peak 1.00 S - - (see functionlist: traffic pattern)
settings, call operation traffic pattern, with starting floor 3.15 NF - no yes, no
settings, call operation emergency travel flexibel [4] 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, call operation VIP travel flexible [4] 1.25 S - no yes, no
settings, call operation ext. land. calls down 1.17 - - no yes, no
settings, call operation ext. land. calls up 1.17 - - no yes, no
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 15
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values settings, call operation group splitting 3.21 NF - - -
settings, parking parking programm [4] 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, fixed parking floor, flex. parking floor, flex. parking zone, flex. mainpark.zone
settings, parking active [5] 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, parking parking floor int. 1.00 S 1 1 1 ... n
settings, parking parking floor ext. 1.00 S - inactive inactive, from module, from times
settings, parking time interval 1.00 - - - (see functionlist: parking floor extern)
settings, parking parking time 1.00 NF 1 s 15 s 0 s (2.21) ...300 s
settings, parking No. of cars at Main Parking Zone 3.13 S 1 1 1 ... 8
settings, safety circuit supervise 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, safety circuit fault at 1.00 NF - low signal low signal, high signal
settings, safety circuit handling of faults 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret & block next floor & block [1], bot. fl. ret & block*, interrupt & block, preopen & relev. off
settings, simple shaft encoder pulse buffer delay ... ms 2.10 NF 10 ms - -
settings, simple shaft encoder pulse reaction time ... ms 2.10 NF 10 ms - -
settings, simple shaft encoder correction travel to 2.10 NF - - -
settings, simple shaft encoder short floor distance 2.10 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, simple shaft encoder impulse up switch 2.10 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, simple shaft encoder impulse down switch 2.10 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, horizontal selector floor level 1.00 NF - direction dependent direction dependent, direction independ.
settings, horizontal selector pulse buffer delay 1.00 NF 10 ms 30 ms 10 ms ...80 ms
settings, horizontal selector pulse reaction time ... ms 1.00 NF 10 ms 50 ms 10 ms ...150 ms
settings, horizontal selector floor counter 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, horizontal selector impulse at term. floor 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, horizontal selector correct. trav. to 1.00 NF - bottom bottom, top
settings, horizontal selector short floor distance 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, horizontal selector impulse up switch 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, horizontal selector impulse down switch 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, vertical selector floor level 1.00 NF - direction dependent direction dependent, direction independ.
settings, vertical selector pulse buffer delay 1.00 NF 10 ms 30 ms 10 ms ... 30 ms ...80 ms
settings, vertical selector pulse reaction time 1.00 NF 10 ms 50 ms 10 ms ... 50 ms ...150 ms
settings, vertical selector floor counter 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, vertical selector impulse at term. floor 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, vertical selector correct. trav. to 1.00 NF - bottom bottom, top
settings, vertical selector short floor distance 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, vertical selector impulse up switch 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, vertical selector impulse down switch 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, digital selector absolute floor level 1.00 - - - -
settings, digital selector fl. level difference 1.00 - - - -
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 16
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values settings, digital selector fl. level correction 1.00 - - - -
settings, digital selector v5 off up 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector v5 off down 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector v4 off up 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector v4 off down 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector v3 off up 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector v3 off down 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector v2 off up 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector v2 off down 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector v1 off up 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector v1 off down 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector v0 off up 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector v0 off down 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector start spd. v1 from 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, ... mm
settings, digital selector start spd. v2 from 1.00 NF - 1 mm inactive, ... mm
settings, digital selector start spd. v3 from 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, ... mm
settings, digital selector start spd. v4 form 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, ... mm
settings, digital selector start spd. v5 from 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, ... mm
settings, digital selector output ref. point 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, digital selector distance ref. point 1.00 - - 1 mm [7] -
settings, digital selector travel height 1.00 - - 0 cm 0 cm
settings, digital selector pulse buffer delay ... ms 1.00 NF 10 ms 30 ms 10 ms ...80 ms
settings, digital selector correct. trav. to 1.00 NF - bottom bottom, top
settings, digital selector learning trav. speed 1.00 NF - V2 V0, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5
settings, digital selector learning activated 1.00 - - - -
settings, absolute pos.-system absolute floor level 2.05 - - - -
settings, absolute pos.-system fl. level difference 2.05 - - - -
settings, absolute pos.-system fl. level correction 2.05 - - - -
settings, absolute pos.-system v5 off up 2.05 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system v5 off down 2.05 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system v4 off up 2.05 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system v4 off down 2.05 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system v3 off up 2.05 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system v3 off down 2.05 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system v2 off up 2.05 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system v2 off down 2.05 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system v1 off up 2.05 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system v1 off down 2.05 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system v0 off up 2.05 S - 0 mm -
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 17
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values settings, absolute pos.-system v0 off down 2.05 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system start spd. v1 from 2.05 - - inactive inactive, ... mm
settings, absolute pos.-system start spd. v2 from 2.05 - - 1 mm inactive, ... mm
settings, absolute pos.-system start spd. v3 from 2.05 - - inactive inactive, ... mm
settings, absolute pos.-system start spd. v4 from 2.05 - - inactive inactive, ... mm
settings, absolute pos.-system start spd. v5 from 2.05 - - inactive inactive, ... mm
settings, absolute pos.-system output ref. point 2.05 NF - no no, at. pos v0, at pos. vfast
settings, absolute pos.-system area of level output ±...mm 3.18 NF - 50 mm 50 .. 250mm
settings, absolute pos.-system travel height 2.05 S - 0 cm -
settings, absolute pos.-system vInsp. off at 2.05 NF - v2 v0, v1, v2
settings, absolute pos.-system pulse buffer delay 2.05 NF 10 ms 30 ms 10 ms .... 80 ms
settings, absolute pos.-system learning travel speed 2.05 NF - v2 v0, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5
settings, absolute pos.-system encoder type 2.05 NF - 25 Bit 24 Bit, 25 Bit
settings, absolute pos.-system install encoder 2.05 - - - -
settings, absolute pos.-system encoder adjustment 2.05 - - - -
settings, absolute pos.-system learning activated 2.05 - - - -
settings, absolute pos.-system vInsp. off down 3.02 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system vInsp. off up 3.02 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system APS-Learn. operation 2.05 S - no yes, no
settings, hydraulic lift direct start 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, hydraulic lift YD change over timer 1.00 NF 0.1 s 2 s 0.1 s ...10 s
settings, hydraulic lift motor delayed off after ... ms 1.00 NF 10 ms 400 ms 0 ms ...1500 ms
settings, hydraulic lift inspection speed 1.00 NF - v0 v0, v1, v2
settings, hydraulic lift delay after ...s 1.00 NF 1 s 2 s 1 s ... 5 s
settings, hydraulic lift thermistor 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret. & block next floor & block, bot. fl. ret. & block, interrupt & block, stop at next floor, interrupt
settings, hydraulic lift PTC output (motor) 1.11 NF - high signal low signal, high signal
settings, hydraulic lift Oil Thermistor 1.00 NF - high signal low signal, high signal
settings, variable freq. AC v-fast delayed on after 1.00 NF 10 ms 200 ms 0 ms ...500 ms
settings, variable freq. AC contactors delayed off after 1.00 NF 10 ms 600 ms 0 ms ...2.000 ms
settings, variable freq. AC v-slow delayed off 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, variable freq. AC regulator fault 1.00 NF - interrupt interrupt & block, interrupt
settings, variable freq. AC thermistor 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret. & block next floor & block, bot. fl. ret. & block [1], interrupt & block, stop at next floor, interrupt
settings, variable freq. AC PTC output (motor) 1.11 NF - high signal low signal, high signal
settings, variable freq. AC thermistor output (oil) 1.00 NF - high signal low signal, high signal
settings, variable freq. AC motor ventilation 1.00 NF 1 s inactive inactive ...600 s
settings, AC unregulated direction delayed on after ... ms 2.11 NF 10 ms - -
settings, AC unregulated inspection speed, fast 2.11 NF - - -
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 18
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values settings, AC unregulated thermistor 2.11 NF - bot. fl. ret & block next floor & block, bot. fl. ret & block [1], interrupt & block, stop at next
floor, interrupt
settings, AC unregulated ptc output (motor) 2.11 NF - - -
settings, AC unregulated oil term. output 2.11 NF - high signal low signal, high signal
settings, AC unregulated motor ventilation 2.11 NF 1 s - -
settings, hydr. variable freq. v-fast delayed on after 2.21 NF 10 ms 200 ms 0 ms ...500 ms
settings, hydr. variable freq. brake delayed on after 2.21 NF 10 ms 0 ms 0 ms ... 2.000 ms
settings, hydr. variable freq. brake delayed off after 2.21 NF 10 ms 0 ms 0 ms ... 2.000 ms
settings, hydr. variable freq. contactors del. off 2.21 NF 10 ms 600 ms 0 ms ...2.000 ms
settings, hydr. variable freq. v-slow delayed off 2.21 NF - no yes, no
settings, hydr. variable freq. motor off at 2.21 NF - regulator stop regulator stop, floor level
settings, hydr. variable freq. brake drop delay 2.21 NF - un-delayed un-delayed, delayed
settings, hydr. variable freq. regulator fault 2.21 NF - interrupt interrupt & block, interrupt
settings, hydr. variable freq. thermistor 2.21 NF - bot. fl. ret. & block next florr & block, bot. fl. ret. & block [1], interrupt & block, stop at next floor, interrupt
settings, hydr. variable freq. PTC output (motor) 2.21 NF - high signal high signal, low signal
settings, hydr. variable freq. Oil Thermistor 2.21 NF - high signal high signal, low signal
settings, regulator remote set-up 3.02 NF - - -
settings, travel monitor contactor monitor active 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, travel monitor start time monitor ...s 1.00 NF 1 s 12 s inactive ...30 s
settings, travel monitor journey time monitor ... s 1.00 NF 1 s 15 s inactive ...45 s
settings, travel monitor braking time monitor 1.00 NF 1 s 20 s inactive ...30 s
settings, travel monitor handling of faults 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret. & block bot. fl. ret. & block [1], interrupt & block, interrupt, no reaction
settings, travel monitor fault brake monitoring 1.00 NF - interrupt & block interrupt & block, interrupt
settings, travel monitor final limit switch 1.00 NF - specification EN specification EN, specefication TRA
settings, relevelling active 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, relevelling type 1.00 S - at floor level at floor level, with recall switch, recall switch to floor
settings, relevelling up on [8] 1.00 NF - 100 mm (DSK), 50 mm (APS)
-
settings, relevelling up off [8] 1.00 NF - 100 mm (DSK), 50 mm (APS)
-
settings, relevelling down on [8] 1.00 NF - 100 mm (DSK), 50 mm (APS)
-
settings, relevelling down off [8] 1.00 NF - 100 mm (DSK), 50 mm (APS)
-
settings, relevelling time limits 1.00 NF - yes yes,no
settings, relevelling max time upwards 1.00 NF 1 s 20 s 1 s ... 20 s
settings, relevelling max time downwards 1.00 NF 1 s 20 s 1 s ... 20 s
settings, relevelling attempt limit 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, relevelling max. relevelling up 1.00 NF 1 x 20 x 5 ... 20 x
MPK 4000
Functionlist from prg. version 4.00
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.2; * default set-up see “technical description” II – C / 19
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values settings, relevelling max relevelling down 1.00 NF 1 x 20 x 5 ... 20 x
settings, relevelling attempt limit -fl. 1 (hydr. lift) 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, relevelling no. exceeded 1.00 S - bot. fl. ret. & block interrupt & block, bot. fl. ret. & block [1], no new relevelling
settings, relevelling monitoring v<0,3m/s 3.12 NF - no yes, no
settings, relevelling handling of faults 1.00 S - bot. fl. ret. & block bot. fl. ret. & block [1], interrupt & block, interrupt
settings, relevelling relevel. on overload 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, Call Blocking block 1.00 S - inactive inactive, from module, from times
settings, Call Blocking time interval 1.00 S - - (see functionlist: door blocking)
settings, transponder/reader key read 3.02 NF - - -
settings, transponder/reader key block 3.02 NF - - -
settings, transponder/reader key set limit 3.11 S - no yes, no
settings, transponder/reader commandset connect 3.11 S - - -
settings, transponder/reader key delete 3.02 NF - - -
settings, remote monitoring remote monitor ID 4.00 S - - (see functionlist: remote control)
settings, remote monitoring Tel.No Modem PC 4.00 S - - ( see functionlist: remote control )
settings, remote monitoring modem configuration 4.00 S - - (see functionlist: remote control)
settings, remote monitoring Modem basic Config. 4.00 S - - (see functionlist: remote control)
settings, remote monitoring Pass. Inc.Call after ... Bellsignals 3.05 S - 1 1 ... 8
settings, net installation floor commission 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, net installation door commision 3.02 NF - no yes, no
settings, autom. function test interval 2.18 S - inactive inactive, 1 week, 2 weeks, 4 weeks
settings, autom. function test next date 2.18 S - 1 jan 2000 00:00 -
settings, autom. function test completion 2.18 S - inactive (test alarm button, leveling offset test, test door open butt.)
settings, autom. function test activate immediately 2.18 S - - -
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH KOLLMORGEN (UK) Ltd.
Broichstrasse 32 Unit 17, St. Asaph Business Park
D-51109 Cologne St. Asaph, Denbighshire LL17OLJ
Telefon +49 (0) 221 89 85 0 United Kingdom
Telefax +49 (0) 221 89 85 30 Telephone 0044-1745-585558
http://www.kollmorgen.de Fax 0044-1745-585828
Email [email protected] Email [email protected]
© KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-04-27 / DO_TB4DHK_GB.doc
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
Contents
1 General notice ................................................................................................................... 4 2 Operating- and control- modules .................................................................................... 4
2.1 BST 40 (MPK 40) .........................................................................................................................4 2.1.1 Terminal set-up on the top side .............................................................................................5 2.1.2 Terminal set-up on the bottom side .......................................................................................5
2.2 BST 400 (MPK 400) .....................................................................................................................6 2.2.1 Terminal set-up on the top side .............................................................................................7 2.2.2 Terminal set-up on the bottom side .......................................................................................8 2.2.3 Extension module EM 16C....................................................................................................9
2.3 BST (MPK 4000)........................................................................................................................10 2.3.1 Terminal set-up on the top side ...........................................................................................11 2.3.2 Terminal set-up on the bottom side .....................................................................................12 2.3.3 Drive extension module regulator (AEWR)..........................................................................13
3 BST Relay-modules ........................................................................................................ 14 3.1 BSTV 40 (MPK 40 / MPK 400)...................................................................................................14 3.2 BSTV (MPK 4000) .....................................................................................................................16
4 Modules Overview .......................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Main module (HK 24) ................................................................................................................17 4.2 Extension modules (EK 24 / EK 08) ........................................................................................18 4.3 HK 24 / EK 24 / EK 08 terminating and extending..................................................................20 4.4 Socket prints MSP 24 / MSP 08 / ISP 34..................................................................................21 4.5 Floor - module (ETG-B004) ......................................................................................................22 4.6 LON™ - Processor - module (LPK-A002) ................................................................................24 4.7 Construction and default set-up of the modules FKF / IRP / ETG / IKL...............................24 4.8 Car and car call-module (FKI)..................................................................................................26 4.9 Car and car call-module (FKP) ................................................................................................27
4.9.1 FKP-Interface 01 .................................................................................................................28 4.9.2 FKP-Interface 02 .................................................................................................................30
4.10 Car module FKF 40 ..................................................................................................................33 4.11 Hall lantern module WFA 40....................................................................................................34 4.12 Interface module IM 40 – 01 / 1,5 qmm...................................................................................36 4.13 Interface module IM 40 – 01 / 2,5 qmm...................................................................................38 4.14 Interface module IM 40 – 03 / 2,5 qmm...................................................................................40 4.15 Interface module IM 40 – 10 / 1,5 qmm...................................................................................42 4.16 Interface module IM 40 – 10 / 2,5 qmm...................................................................................44 4.17 Interface module IM 40 – 11 / 1,5 qmm...................................................................................46 4.18 Interface module IM 40 – 12 / 2,5 qmm...................................................................................48 4.19 Interface module IM 40 - V.24..................................................................................................50 4.20 Interface module W 40 – IF 002...............................................................................................51
III / 2 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
5 Technical data..................................................................................................................53 5.1 Power supply MPK .................................................................................................................. 53 5.2 Power supply control (24 VDC) .............................................................................................. 53 5.3 Drawing of current (modules)................................................................................................. 53 5.4 Monitoring PTC ........................................................................................................................ 53 5.5 Inputs........................................................................................................................................ 54 5.6 Outputs..................................................................................................................................... 54
6 Overview of the modules in the MPK-Systems ............................................................55
06-04-27 III / 3
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
1 General notice Unless otherwise expressly stated in this description, the inputs are “high active”. This means if there is a voltage of +24V at the input, the input is detected as set and the signal further processed.
Note: Ground the network shielding (SLON and GLON) only one-sided.
2 Operating- and control- modules 2.1 BST 40 (MPK 40)
ZRAM
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
TDA
0VA
RD
A
LS LT LT
EP
RO
M-O
EPR
OM
-U
N U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 N1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
207
507
500
200
501
201
+- PE
FST
ON
TERM
OFF
LT
D
F
C
G
A
B
E
H
A Ribbon cable to relay board BSTV
B Socket for IM 40-V.24 (serial module)
C Setting of display contrast
D Delete key, the function is not currently utilised
E Bus-termination, the jumper must be in the ON position!
F Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
G Switch “Landing call off“ (S35)
H LED-indicators
III / 4 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
2.1.1 Terminal set-up on the top side
Term. Serial interface (Option) Term. Free programmable inputs TDA Data interface A (transmit) E1 Contactor monitor (set-up fixed) 0VA Data interface A E2 Safety circuit * RDA Data interface A (receive) E3 Zone safety circuit * E4 Control panel test on * E5 Control panel test up * E6 Control panel test down * E7 Shutdown light off * E8 Monitoring light voltage *
* Default set-up
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
the input performance is set via the menu (“low active“, “high active“)
Term. Power supply Term. Network interface 500 Supply, control (ground) LS Shielding, network, control 200 Supply, control (+24V) LT network, control 501 Supply, lift cage (ground) LT network, control 201 Supply, lift cage (+24V) - Feed, external power pack (ground) + Feed, external power pack (+24V) PE Protective conductor FST Fault voltage test
2.1.2 Terminal set-up on the bottom side
Term. Query safety circuit Term. Free programmable outputs N Neutral conductor (connection) A1 Re-levelling / decelerate * U1 Power monitoring (fuse F1) A2 Shutdown light off * U2 Passive safety circuit A3 Bridge S10 * U3 Emergency stop A4 Collective fault register * U4 Landing door contacts A5 In use light * U5 Lift car door contacts A6 Out of service * U6 Lock contacts A7 Lock magnet * N1 Neutral conductor (transmission) A8 Valve control *
* Default set-up
Term. Landing calls Term. Landing calls 207 +24V (1,5 A) R5 Landing call 5 R1 Landing call 1 R6 Landing call 6 R2 Landing call 2 R7 Landing call 7 R3 Landing call 3 R8 Landing call 8 R4 Landing call 4 507 Ground
the output performance is “low active“; i.e. output = +24 V: the function is not active
output = 0 V: the function is active
06-04-27 III / 5
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
2.2 BST 400 (MPK 400)
C
A
B
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88E
1E
2E
3E
4E
5E
6E
7E
8
500
200
501
201
+- PE
FST
J1J2J3
MDSK / APS
TDA
0VA
RD
A
L RZRAM
Kanal AKanal BService
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8N U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 N1
D
E F
GH
KL
M
J
I
LSG
LTG
LTG
LSS
LTS
LTS
BL
BH
EBN
III / 6 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
A Switch „Landing call off“ (S35)
B LED-indicators
C Setting of display contrast
D Ribbon cable to relay board BSTV
E Jumper 1: Kollmorgen Shaftbus, Jumper 2 – 3: the function is not currently utilised
F Socket for IM 40-V.24 (serial module)
G Socket for DSK / APS (absolute position system)
H LED for increm. encoder channel DSK and Service-LED for SLON-connection*
I Socket for GLON-LPK
J Ribbon cable to extension module
K Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
L I²C-interface
M Set-up for Eprom-size, the function is not currently utilised
N LED of Kollmorgen Shaftbus communication
*Service-LED: If the board is functioning correctly, the LED flashes briefly when the control is switched on. If the LED does not light up or remains constantly lit, a hardware error has occurred at the SLON-connection. Please replace the BST-module with a new BST-module.
2.2.1 Terminal set-up on the top side Term. Serial interface (Option) Term. DSK / APS / DCP TDA Data interface A (transmit) 81 DSK-Reference-point-output* 0VA Data interface A 82 DSK-Zone RDA Data interface A (receive) 83 Increm. encoder chan. A (DSK) / Data + (APS) 84 Increm. encoder chan. B (DSK) / Data - (APS) 85 Clock + (APS) 86 Clock - (APS) 87 DCP + 88 DCP -
*APS – Reference-point-output is only as free programmable output on EM no. 17 available (see chap. 2.2.3)
Term. Power supply Term. Network interface 500 Supply, control (ground) BL Kollmorgen Shaftbus (BUS low) 200 Supply, control (+24V) BH Kollmorgen Shaftbus (BUS high) 501 Supply, lift cage (ground) LSS Shielding, network, control 201 Supply, lift cage (+24V) LTS network, control - Feed, external power pack (ground) LTS network, control + Feed, external power pack (+24V) LSG Shielding, network, group PE Protective conductor LTG network, group FST Fault voltage test LTG network, group
06-04-27 III / 7
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
2.2.2 Terminal set-up on the bottom side
Term. Query safety circuit Term. Free programmable inputs N Neutral conductor (connection) E1 Contactor monitor (set-up fixed) U1 Power monitoring (fuse F1) E2 Safety circuit * U2 Passive safety circuit E3 Zone safety circuit * U3 Emergency stop E4 Control panel test on * U4 Landing door contacts E5 Control panel test up * U5 Lift car door contacts E6 Control panel test down * U6 Lock contacts E7 Shutdown light off * N1 Neutral conductor (transmission) E8 Monitoring light voltage *
* Default set-up
Term. Free programmable outputs A1 Re-levelling / decelerate * A2 Shutdown light off * A3 Bridge S10 * A4 Collective fault register * A5 In use light * A6 Out of service * A7 Door fault message * A8 Valve control *
* Default set-up
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
the input performance is set via the menu (“low active“, “high active“)
the output performance is “low active“; i.e. output = +24 V: the function is not active
output = 0 V: the function is active
III / 8 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
2.2.3 Extension module EM 16C
The extension module provides the flexible assembly of the BST 400. Additions to the range of signals, inputs, outputs and calls are handled by these modules.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- +
24V
0
5 4
32
1
6
78
9
B
C
A
- +0
5 4
32
1
6
78
90 - 7
8, 9
X
Y
D
A Ribbon cable to BST or next extension module
B Power supply 24VDC
C LED of the 24V power supply
D rotary coding switch for the set-up of the extension module no. 0 – 7*
* set-up only for the unit place. The menue displays the module with no. 10 – 17.
Notice for the set-up of extension module no. 17! The set-up of the terminals 1 – 8 is fixed! The term. 9 – 16 don’t have a set-up. If you need the signals: ”V-R (electr. emerg. operat.), V3, V4, V5, APS-Reference-point-output”, you have to use the terminals 9 – 16 on module no. 17!
Term. Set-up extension module no. 17 Term. Set-up extension module no. 17 1 v-relev. (output) 9 Free 2 v0 (output) 10 Free 3 v-Inspection (output) 11 Free 4 v1 (output) 12 Free 5 v2 (output) 13 Free 6 Regulator fault (input) 14 Free 7 Regulator electr. stop (input) 15 Free 8 Regulator enable (input) 16 Free
Diameters: X Y Height* * incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
65 mm 125 mm 56 mm
06-04-27 III / 9
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
2.3 BST (MPK 4000)
N
U1
U2
U3
U4
U5
U6
N1
ZRAM
LR
A1
F10
M4
8182838485868788
501201500500200200
PEFST20V20V18V18V
TDA0VARDA
TDB0VBRDB
LSSLTSLTS
LSGLTGLTG
A9A10A11A12A13A14A15A16
A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8
E9E10E11E12E13E14E15E16
E1E2E3E4E5E6E7E8
R1R2R3R4R5R6R7R8
AB
EPROM
EPROM
A B
C
DE
GH
M
I J K
F
L
III / 10 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
A Socket for SLON-LPK
B Socket for GLON-LPK
C Setting of display contrast
D Increm. Encoder inputs for DSK
E Socket for DSK / APS (absolute position system)
F LED-indicators
G Ribbon cable to relay board BSTV
H Ribbon cable to module AEWR
I Push button ”call to top / bottom“
J Push button “serviceoperation doors normal / closed”
K Switch “Landing call off“ (S35)
L Fuse power supply +24V
M Area for plug in module AEWR
2.3.1 Terminal set-up on the top side
Term. Power supply Term. DSK / APS / DCP PE Protective conductor 81 DSK-Reference-point-output FST Fault voltage test 82 DSK-Zone 20V∼ Feed 24V power supply 83 Increm. encoder chan. A (DSK) / Data + (APS)
20V∼ 84 Increm. encoder chan. B (DSK) / Data - (APS)
18V∼ Feed 5V power supply 85 Clock + (APS)
18V∼ 86 Clock - (APS) 87 DCP + 88 DCP -
Term. Power supply Term. Serial interface 501 Supply, lift cage (ground) TDA Data interface A (transmit) 201 Supply, lift cage (+24V) 0VA Data interface A 500 Supply, control (ground) RDA Data interface A (receive) 500 TDB Data interface B (transmit) 200 Supply, control (+24V) 0VB Data interface B 200 RDB Data interface B (receive)
Term. Network interface LSS Shielding, network, control LTS network, control LTS network, control LSG Shielding, network, group LTG network, group LTG network, group
06-04-27 III / 11
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
2.3.2 Terminal set-up on the bottom side
Term. Query safety circuit Term. Landing call (down)* N Neutral conductor (connection) R1 Landing call (down) 1 U1 Power monitoring (fuse F1) R2 Landing call (down) 2 U2 Passive safety circuit R3 Landing call (down) 3 U3 Emergency stop R4 Landing call (down) 4 U4 Landing door contacts R5 Landing call (down) 5 U5 Lift car door contacts R6 Landing call (down) 6 U6 Lock contacts R7 Landing call (down) 7 N1 Neutral conductor (transmission) R8 Landing call (down) 8
* Condition for the arrangement of R1-R8 with the landing calls 1-8 are set up in the following parameters “basic settings / MPK-Control /
landing calls 1-8 BST -> YES“. With the set-up “... landing calls 1-8 BST -> NO“ the terminals R1-R8 are accessible as free
programmable I/Os.
Term. Free programmable inputs ** Term. Free programmable outputs ** E1 Contactor monitor (set-up fixed) A1 Re-levelling / decelerate (set-up fixed) E2 Safety circuit (set-up fixed) A2 Collective fault register E3 Zone safety circuit (set-up fixed) A3 Door fault message E4 Control panel test on (set-up fixed) A4 Bridge S10 E5 Control panel test up (set-up fixed) A5 Do. cntr. open door 1 E6 Control panel test down (set-up fixed) A6 Do. cntr. close door 1 E7 Shutdown light off A7 Free E8 Monitoring light voltage A8 Free E9 Fire evacuation service A9 At fire evacuation floor E10 Emergency power service A10 At emergency power floor E11 Emergency power travel A11 Emergency power sequence E12 Active for emergency supply A12 Shutdown light off E13 Free A13 Free E14 Free A14 Out of service E15 Free A15 In use light E16 Free A16 Free
** Notice: With exception of the terminals E1 – E6 and A1 the functions of the inputs and outputs are free (E7 - E16 / A2 - A16) selective
via the menu!
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
the input performance is set via the menu (“low active“, “high active“)
the output performance is “low active“; i.e. output = +24 V: the function is not active
output = 0 V: the function is active
III / 12 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
2.3.3 Drive extension module regulator (AEWR)
RA3RA4RA5RA6RA7RA8RA9
RA10RA11RA12RA13
500RE5RE6RE7RE8
210500RE1RE2RE3RE4RA1RA2
AEWR
A
B
A Connection to BST
B LED-indicator of the input-/output signals (RE... / RA...)
Term. Input / output regulator Term. Input / output regulator 210 Supply regulator (+24V / 250 mA) RA7 v0 (slow) 500 Supply regulator (ground) RA8 v1 (intermed.) RE1 Regulator fault RA9 v2 (fast) RE2 Regulator lift stop RA10 v3 RE3 Regulator enable RA11 v4 RE4 Free RA12 v5 RA1 APS-Reference-point-output RA13 vR (Control panel test) RA2 Travel 500 Ground RA3 Up RE5 Free RA4 Down RE6 Free RA5 vN re-levelling RE7 Free RA6 vI inspection RE8 Free
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
Terminals Type Diameter [mm²] 210 - RE 8 Mini-Combicon 0,14 - 1,5
06-04-27 III / 13
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
3 BST Relay-modules 3.1 BSTV 40 (MPK 40 / MPK 400)
21 43 65
152151
156155
K 31
K 32
K 33
K 34
K 35
1112
1314
1516
1718
1920
2122
23
PTC
K 3
1K 3
2K 3
3K 3
421
43
65
B
A
A Indicator for motor-PTC. The LED illuminates if the PTC resistor has not been triggered.
B Connection to BST 40 / 400
Term. PTC input Term. Relay board / free program. relay 151 Motor PTC 11-20 Outputs of pilot control relay K31 - K34 152 21-23 Free program. relay K35 155 Open: hydraulic drive 156 Bridged: cable drive
Term. Drive LRV, ... 1 Travel 2 Up (...K 31) 3 Down (...K 32) 4 Fast (...K 33) 5 Star / delta (...K 34) 6 v ½
III / 14 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
With hydraulic systems, in addition to the program-controlled switching-off of the upward signal (K31), a forced switching-off by the motor PTC resistor monitoring is carried out.
15
615
5
Terminals “155“ and “156“ bridged (function = OFF): • “K31“ not switched off by the PTC resistor unit for the motor PTC • Setting for all cable drives
156
155
Terminals “155“ and “156“ bridged (function = ON): • “K31“ forced switch-off by the PTC resistor unit for the motor PTC • Default setting for all hydraulic drives
The input circuit (PTC) has a switching hysteresis (s. chap. techn. data).
Connection layout and internal circuit, pilot control / free program. relay:
K31 K32 K33 K34
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20Terminals onBSTV 40
AC-unregulated K1 K2 K3
Bridge
K4
Hydraulic K11 K2 Valve fast K13 K12
11
14 12
21 22 23
K35
Speed fast
Free select.
variable freq. AC *
Hydr. variable freq. *
Free select.
Free select.
2
2
3
4
1
1
*
* only MPK 400 * Bridge dependent on regulator
1 Drive 2 Safety contactor 3 Brake 4 Enable of precontrol hydraulic
06-04-27 III / 15
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
3.2 BSTV (MPK 4000)
21
43
65
87
KL2KL1
KL4KL3
K 3
0
K 3
1
K 3
2
K 3
3
K 3
4
K 3
5P
TC1
PTC
2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Ribbon cable terminal tothe BST
K 3
1K 3
2K 3
3K 3
4
21
43
65
87
Term. Relay module / free sel. relay 11 - 21 Outputs of the relays K30 - K33 22 - 24 Free programmable relay Term. PTC inputs KL1 PTC 1 - motor PTC KL2 PTC 1 - motor PTC KL3 PTC 2 - oil PTC KL4 PTC 2 - oil PTC
Term. Drive LRV, ... 1 Travel 2 Up (...K 31) 3 Down (...K 32) 4 Fast (...K 33) 5 Star / Delta (...K 34) 6 v ½ 7 500 8 500
For hydraulic installations the switch off of the travel up signal is given via a forced switch off of the motor PTC monitor (K30), as well as the program controlled switch off via “K31“.
Connection arrangement and circuit of the relay module / free programmable relay
K31 K32 K33 K34
11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Terminals ofthe BSTV
AC unregulated K1 K2 K3 K4
K30
12
11
14 12
22 23 24
K35
Bridge
Hydraulic K11 K2 Valve fast K13 K12
AC / Hydr. var. freq. K5K03 K7
Valve control
free selct.
free selct.
The input circuit (PTC) has a switching hysteresis (s. chap. techn. data).
III / 16 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
4 Modules Overview 4.1 Main module (HK 24)
The main module is a multi-purpose I/O PCD. The I/Os can be connected as inputs, outputs or calls.
The functionality of the module (FKF / IRP / ETG / IKL) is given by the EPROM on the LPK module that is plugged into the HK24-module.
The signal connection is done via the base modules. The arrangement of the 24 terminals are displayed and can be changed on the display of the BST.
The main module is extendible via the extension modules (EK24, EK08) which provide additional I/Os.
Notice if no extension module is plugged to the main module, both ribbon cable terminals have to be connected via a ribbon cable bridge. This ensures proper operation of the module.
200
500 LT LT LS
B5V
210
500 21 3 4 65 7 8 109 11 12 1413 15 16 1817 19 20 2221 23 24
X
Y
E
DCA B
F
A Delete key for location information of (floor-) module ETG M24
B Socket for LPK
C Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
D Terminal for extension module or termination
E Terminal for termination
F Socket for base module
Indicators:
• LED B illuminated: The power supply is switched to the output drives.
• LED 5V illuminated: The power supply for the logic devices is present.
Term. Power supply Term. Network interface 500 Ground LS Shielding, network 200 +24V LT Connection, network
06-04-27 III / 17
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
LT Connection, network
Term. Output pow. Sup. (via base module) Term. Inputs / outputs (via base module) 500 Ground 1 - 24 Output 210 +24V 1 - 24 Input
Diameters: X Y height* height** * incl. plastic panel
161 mm 106 mm 44 mm 56 mm ** incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
4.2 Extension modules (EK 24 / EK 08)
The extension module is a multi-purpose I/O PCD. The I/Os can be connected as inputs, outputs or calls.
The module is used for an I/O-extension of the main module. The signal connection is done via the base modules.
The arrangement of the 24 terminals are displayed and can be changed on the display of the BST.
Notice if no extension module is plugged to the main module, both ribbon cable terminals have to be connected via a ribbon cable bridge. This ensures proper operation of the module.
200
500
B5V
210
500
B5V
200
500
210
500
(26)
(25)
(27)
(28)
(30)
(29)
(31)
(32)
(26)
(25)
(27)
(28)
(30)
(29)
(31)
(32)
(34)
(33)
(35)
(36)
(38)
(37)
(39)
(40)
(42)
(41)
(43)
(44)
(46)
(45)
(47)
(48)
X
Y
A
X
Y
CB
D
A B C
D
EK 24 EK 08
III / 18 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
A Connection to main module (HK) or extension module (EK)
B Terminal for extension module or termination
C Terminal for termination
D Socket for base module
Indicators:
• LED B illuminated: The power supply is switched to the output drives.
• LED 5V illuminated: The power supply for the logic devices is present.
Extension module 24: Term. Power supply Term. Output power supply (via base module) 500 Ground 500 Ground 200 +24V 210 +24V Term. Inputs / outputs (via base module) 25-48* Output 25-48* Input
* the terminal-no. is depended on the number of extension modules
Diameters:
X Y height* height** * incl. plastic panel 139 mm 106 mm 44 mm 56 mm ** incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
Extension module 08: Term. Power supply Term. Output power supply (via base module) 500 Ground 500 Ground 200 +24V 210 +24V Term. Inputs / outputs (via base module) 25-32* Output 25-32* Input
* the terminal-no. is depended on the number of extension modules
Diameters:
X Y height* height** * incl. plastic panel 84 mm 106 mm 44 mm 56 mm ** incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
06-04-27 III / 19
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.3 HK 24 / EK 24 / EK 08 terminating and extending
The termination terminates the signal-bus and avoids disturbing signal reflections.
HK without extension module (EK) B5V
HK 24
A
HK with an extension module (EK) 20
050
0
EK24 / EK08
B5V
HK 24
B A
HK with two extension modules (EK
200
500
EK24
B5V
HK 24
200
500
EK08
B AB
A Connection for termination
B Connection HK-EK or EK-EK
III / 20 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
4.4 Socket prints MSP 24 / MSP 08 / ISP 34
MSP 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
210
500 21 3 4 65 7 8 109 11 12 1413 15 16 1817 19 20 2221 23 24
ISP 34
A
B
A
B
C
210
500 21 3 4 65 7 8
MSP 08
A
B
A Sockets for interconnecting the HK or EK
B LED-row displays the actual status of the I/Os
C 34- pol. Ribbon cable terminal
Pin Ribbon cable terminal* (ISP 34) Pin Ribbon cable* (ISP 34) 1 500 (ground) 18 Display segment 7 2 +24V 19 Arrow up 3 Call 1 20 Arrow down 4 Call 2 21 Gong 5 Call 3 22 Priority call (car) 6 Call 4 23 T1* 7 Call 5 24 T2* 8 Call 6 25 T3* 9 Call 7 26 T4* 10 Door open push button 27 T5* 11 Door close push button 28 Alarm LQ** 12 Display segment 1 29 Alarm NO** 13 Display segment 2 30 Alarm C** 14 Display segment 3 31 Emergency light +** 15 Display segment 4 32 Emergency light -** 16 Display segment 5 33 +24V 17 Display segment 6 34 500 (ground)
* Arrangement according to comp. Kronenberg / comp. Schäfer ** additional signals on Combicon terminals for further connection
Term. Combicon terminal (ISP 34) Term. Combicon terminal (ISP 34) 1 – 5 T1 – T5 8 Alarm C 6 Alarm LQ 9 Emergency light + 7 Alarm NO 10 Emergency light -
MSP 24 / 08: ISP 34: Term. Type Term. Type 210 / 510 Combicon [0,2 - 2,5 mm²] 1 – 10 Combicon [0,2 - 2,5 mm²] 1 – 24 / 1 - 8 Mini-Combicon [0,14 - 1,5 mm²]
06-04-27 III / 21
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.5 Floor - module (ETG-B004)
5V
LED
R1 R2
E3A3
E4A4
J3 R3
A6A5
A8A7
A B
LTLT
200500
ETGB ...
X
YA
B
C
A Program version
B LED “Service“
C Delete key for the location of the floor module
Function: Landing calls, hall lantern up/down, ....
Mounting location: Shaft, depended on floors and door sides
Term. Power supply Term. Network interface 500 Ground LT Connection, network 200 +24V (power consumption 30 mA - 1600 mA) LT Connection, network
Term. Calls (default set-up) Term. input (default set-up) R1 Call up (outp. 24V / 100mA, inp. 24V / 7mA) E3* Free (24V / 7mA) R2 Call down (outp. 24V / 100mA, inp. 24V / 7mA) E4** Free (24V / 7mA) R3* Free (Ausg. 24V / 100mA, Eing. 24V /7mA)
Term. output (default set-up) Term. output (default set-up) A3* Free (24V / 100mA) A6 hall lantern down grp.No. *** (24V / 250mA) A4** Free (24V / 100mA) A7 hall lantern up grp.No. 2 (24V / 250mA) A5 hall lantern up grp.No. *** (24V / 250mA) A8 hall lantern down grp.No. 2 (24V / 250mA)
** A4 or E4 useable *** Grp.No. is the same like the number into the menu
* the function is depended on the set-up of jumper J3: Set-up of the Ultrex terminals:
E3A3
J3 R3A
E3A3
J3 R3B
1
E ... A ... R ...
12 12 23 1
Jumper position A: A3 = output and E3 = input; R3 no function Jumper position B: R3 = call; A3 and E3 no function
E(2) = +24V; E(1) = input A(2) = output; A(1) = ground R(3) = +24V; R(2) = inp. / outp. R(1) = ground
III / 22 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
Terminals Type LT / 200 / 500 Mini- Combicon 0,14 - 1,5 [mm²]
Terminaldescription
device MPK-Menue * Default set up Note R1 1 (C) Call up R2 2 (C) Call down. R3 3 (X) Priority call E3 3 (X) Free [1] A3 4 (O) Free
E4/A4 5 (U) Free [2] A5 6 (O) hall latern up grp.no.* [3] A6 7 (O) hall latern down grp.no.* [3] A7 8 (O) hall latern up grp.no 2 A8 9 (O) hall latern down grp.no 2
*terminaltype: (C) = call (input and output); (X) = call or input; (U) = input or output; (O) = output
[1]: The terminals are available in the menue, if the function „priority call“ is deleted from the terminal R3 and
the jumper J3 is in the position A!
[2]: Either input or output!
[3]: * = current group-no. see menue setting
Indicators:
• LED “5V“: is illuminated if the power supply for the logic devices is switched on.
• LED “Service“: flashes once on switch on and during actuation of the Delete switch.
A permanent flashing or a permanent illumination of that LED indicates:
• the module is defective and has to be exchanged.
4
13,5
all data in [mm]
Diameters: X Y Height*
103 mm 47 mm 17,5 mm
Scale drawing for the drill holes ETG B004:
83,215,1 4,7
23,5 23,5
A A
A M3-bolt or drill: 3,2
All data in [mm]
06-04-27 III / 23
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.6 LON™ - Processor - module (LPK-A002)
XXX YY 0.00TT.MM.JJ G_T_EE
LED
LPK
CD
E
GF
A
B
A RUN-LED
B Socket for programeprom
C Module type (FKF, IRP, ETG, IKL, ....)
D MPK-Type („4K“ = MPK 4000, „4H“ = MPK 400)
E Program version
F Location: „G“ = Group number, „T“ = Door side, „EE“ = Floor
G Version date of the program
Notice: The functionality of the LON™-Processor-module (LPK) is stored in the EPROM’s.
4.7 Construction and default set-up of the modules FKF / IRP / ETG / IKL
LPK-
A002XXX YY 0.00
TT.MM
.JJ G_T_EE
HK 24
FKFIRPETG M24IKL
Module-type Mount. location Function Extension
FKF (car functions) Car Output doors 1 / 2, shaft copier, inspection, ...
Max 16 inp./outp. (EK 08 + EK 08)
IRP (car calls) Car Car calls, indicators, door open/close push button, ...
Max 32 inp./outp. (EK 08 + EK 24)
ETG (floors) Shaft Landing calls, hall lantern, ..
Max 32 inp./outp. (EK 08 + EK 24)
IKL (intelligent terminals) (any location) Any input-/output functions Max 32 inp./outp. (EK 08 + EK 24)
III / 24 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
Term. FKF IRP ETG M24 IKL 1 Correction top * Door open push button ..* Landing call up* ** 2 Correction bottom * Door close push button ..* Landing call down* ** 3 Pre limt switch top * ** ** ** 4 Pre limt switch bottom * ** ** ** 5 Inspect. operation* Display segment 1 * Display segment 1 * ** 6 Inspection up * Display segment 2 * Display segment 2 * ** 7 Inspection down * Display segment 3 * Display segment 3 * ** 8 ** Display segment 4 * Display segment 4 * ** 9 ** Display segment 5 * Display segment 5 * **
10 ** Display segment 6 * Display segment 6 * ** 11 ** Display segment 7 * Display segment 7 * ** 12 ** Display segment 8 * Display segment 8 * ** 13 ** Arrow up * Hall lantern up * ** 14 ** Arrow down * Hall lantern down * ** 15 ** Car call fl. 1 * ** ** 16 ** Car call fl. 2 * ** ** 17 Photocell door 1 * Car call fl. 3 * ** ** 18 Press. contact door 1 * Car call fl. 4 * ** ** 19 Nudging. door 1 * Car call fl. 5 * ** ** 20 Nudging signal door 1 * Car call fl. 6 * ** ** ...T: dep. on door side 21 Limit sw. open d. 1 * Car call fl. 7 * ** ** ...A: dep. on lift no. 22 Limit sw. close d. 1 * Car call fl. 8 * ** ** 23 Door contr. open d. 1 * Car call fl. 9 * ** ** *: default set-up 24 Door contr. close d. 1 * Car call fl. 10 * ** ** **: free
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
06-04-27 III / 25
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.8 Car and car call-module (FKI)
X
Y
201
501
5V
RUN
SYSA B
C
D
GLT LT LS
F
E
E
ON
TER
MO
FF
1 2 3 4
ON
FKI
4K
1.
2201
.01.
01 *
_0_0
0
A To guarantee an error-free connection to the BST, the switches must be set as stated above!
1 2 3 4
ON
OFF ON
B Delete key: The function is not currently utilised.
C The program version and the date can be change!
D Displays:
• LED 5V comes on: The power supply for the logic components is present. • LED RUN flashes: The module is ready for operation. • LED SYS comes on: The delete key has been actuated.
E Ribbon cable to interface-modules; for the connection between FKF and the interface-modules, only the attached ribbon cable is to be used. Do not lengthenen the cable.
F Bus-termination, the jumper must be in the ON position!
G Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
* default set-up see chap. interface modules
Function: Door open/close, shaft copier, inspection, up to 8 car calls, door open/close push button, ...
Mount. location: car Interface modules: IM 40 – 01, - 03, - 10, -11, -12
Term. Power supply Term. Network interface 201 +24V LT Connection, network, control 501 Ground LT Connection, network, control LS Shielding, network, control
Diameters: X Y Height* Height** * incl. plastic panel
93 mm 130 mm 45 mm 52 mm ** incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
III / 26 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
4.9 Car and car call-module (FKP)
X
Y
201
501
5V
RUN
202
D
E
LT LT LS
203
LEDC
B
A
F
A LPK module
B Programeprom
C Service-LED
D Displays:
• LED 5V comes on: The power supply for the logic components is present. • LED RUN flashes: The module is ready for operation. • LED 202 comes on: power supply term. 202 activated • LED 203 comes on: power supply term. 203 activated
E Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
F Slot for FKP-interface
Function: Door open/close, shaft copier, inspection, up to 32 car calls, door open/close push button, ...
Mount. location: car
Term. Power supply Term. Network interface 201 +24V LT Connection, network, control 501 Ground LT Connection, network, control LS Shielding, network, control
Diameters: X Y Height* Height** * incl. plastic panel
180 mm 108 mm 43 mm 53 mm ** incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
06-04-27 III / 27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.9.1 FKP-Interface 01
The assembly is used to connect signals (copying, internal calls, ....) to the FKP. The terminals are useable for line wire up to 2,5 mm².
202
12A
12B
13A
13B
71 72 502
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8
60 60A
60B
63 260
502
71 72
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
TA1
TA2
TE1
TE2
TE3
TE4
203
203
203
203
203
203
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
R17
R18
R19
R20
R21
R22
R23
R24
R25
R26
R27
R28
R29
R30
R31
R32
Term. Copier signals 202 +24V 12A Impulse/Level up 12B Impulse/Level down 13A Correction top 13B Correction bottom 71 Zone-signal S71 72 Zone-signal S72 502 Ground
Term. Free programmable outputs Term. Car call A1 door contr. open door 1 * R1 - 32 Car call 1 - 32 * A2 door contr. close door 1 * A3 door contr. open door 2 * A4 door contr. close door 2 * A5 Shutdown light off * A6 Fan output * A7 Free * A8 Free *
* Default set-up FKP * Default set-up FKP
III / 28 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Display segment E1 Photocell door 1 * D1 Display segment 1 * E2 Press. contact door 1 * D2 Display segment 2 * E3 Open limit switch door 1 * D3 Display segment 3 * E4 Close limit switch door 1 * D4 Display segment 4 * E5 Photocell door 2 * D5 Display segment 5 * E6 Press. contact door 2 * D6 Display segment 6 * E7 Open limit switch door 2 * D7 Display segment 7 * E8 Close limit switch door 2 * D8 Display segment 8 *
* Default set-up FKP * Default set-up FKP Term. Inspection, Power supply, .... Term. Travel direction, free progr. term. 60 Inspection D9 Arrow-up *
60A Inspection travel up D10 Arrow-down * 60B Inspection travel down TA1 Overload * 63 Overload (input) TA2 Free * 260 +24V (Inspection) TE1 Door open push button door 1 * 502 Ground TE2 Door close push button door 1 * 71 bridged int. with term. 71 (only clamping point!) TE3 Landing control off * 72 bridged int. with term. 72 (only clamping point!) TE4 Free *
* Default set-up FKP Term. Power supply 202 … +24V 502 … Ground 203 … +24V (R9 – R32)
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set
input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
06-04-27 III / 29
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.9.2 FKP-Interface 02
The assembly is used to connect signals (copying, internal calls, ....) to the FKP. The terminals are useable for line wire up to 2,5 mm². The connections ST1 / ST2 are used for cabin-panel that can be plugged.
202
12A
12B
13A
13B
71 72 502
R25
R26
R27
R28
R29
R30
R31
R32
FK1
FK2
FK3
FK4
FK5
FK6
FK7
FK8
203
203
203
203
R21
R22
R23
R24
1
10
ST2 34
1
ST11
34
ST3
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8
60 60A
60B
63 260
502
71 72
202
202
202
202
202
202
NL+
NL-
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 ALQ
AN
OA
C
KL1
KL2
502
502
502
502
502
502
TE2TE1 TE3 TE4 TA2TA1B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 AR D R
A Measuring point for the signals of ribbon cable ST1/ST2 without terminal
B Connection to module W40-IF
Term. Copier signals 202 +24V 12A Impulse/Level up 12B Impulse/Level down 13A Correction top 13B Correction bottom 71 Zone-signal S71 72 Zone-signal S72 502 Ground
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Free programmable outputs E1 Photocell door 1 * A1 Door contr. open door 1 * E2 Press. contact door 1 * A2 Door contr. close door 1 * E3 Open limit switch door 1 * A3 Door contr. open door 2 * E4 Close limit switch door 1 * A4 Door contr. close door 2 * E5 Photocell door 2 * A5 Shutdown light off * E6 Press. contact door 2 * A6 Fan output * E7 Open limit switch door 2 * A7 Free * E8 Close limit switch door 2 * A8 Free *
* Default set-up * Default set-up
Term. Calls R25 –R31
Car calls floor 25 – 31*
* Default set-up
III / 30 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
Term. Inspection, … Term. Emerg. call / Alarm 60 Inspection T1 Phone connection T1
60A Inspection travel up T2 Phone connection T2 60B Inspection travel down T3 Phone connection T3 63 Overload (input) T4 Phone connection T4 260 +24V (Inspection) T5 Phone connection T5 502 Ground ALQ Alarm acknowledgement 71 Zone signal S71 ANO Alarm push button 72 Zone signal S72 AC Alarm push button
Term. Free terminals, power supply FK1 – FK8
(for free use, no programmable, see ribbon cable connection ST2)
Term. Power supply, emerg. light Term. Free terminals, power supply 202 + 24V KL1 (for free use, no programmable) 202 KL2 (for free use, no programmable) 202 502 Ground 202 502 202 502 202 502 NL+ Emerg. light + 502 NL- Emerg. light - 502
Term. Power supply, calls 203 +24V R21 – R24
Car calls floor 21 – 24 *
* Default set-up
Pin Ribbon cable connection ST1 Pin Ribbon cable connection ST1 1 502 / Ground 18 D7 / Display segment 7 * 2 202 / +24V 19 D9 / Arrow - up * 3 Car call 1 * 20 D10 / Arrow – down * 4 Car call 2 * 21 TA1 / Overload (output)* 5 Car call 3 * 22 TE3 / Landing control off * 6 Car call 4 * 23 Phone connection T1 7 Car call 5 * 24 Phone connection T2 8 Car call 6 * 25 Phone connection T3 9 Car call 7 * 26 Phone connection T4 10 TE1 / door open push button 1 * 27 Phone connection T5 11 TE2 / door close push button 1 * 28 ALQ / Alarm acknowledgement 12 D1 / Display segment 1 * 29 ANO / Alarm push button 13 D2 / Display segment 2 * 30 AC / Alarm push button 14 D3 / Display segment 3 * 31 NL+ / emerg. light + 15 D4 / Display segment 4 * 32 NL- / emerg. light - 16 D5 / Display segment 5 * 33 202 / +24V 17 D6 / Display segment 6 * 34 502 / Ground
* Default set-up
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set
input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
06-04-27 III / 31
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
Pin Ribbon cable connection ST2 Pin Ribbon cable connection ST2 1 500 / Ground 18 Car call 21 * 2 203 / +24V 19 Car call 22 * 3 Car call 8 * 20 Car call 23 * 4 Car call 9 * 21 TA2 / free * 5 Car call 10 * 22 D8 / Display segment 8 * 6 Car call 11 * 23 FK1 7 Car call 12 * 24 FK2 8 Car call 13 * 25 FK3 9 Car call 14 * 26 KL1 10 TE4 / free * 27 KL2 11 Car call 24 * 28 FK4 12 Car call 15 * 29 FK5 13 Car call 16 * 30 FK6 14 Car call 17 * 31 FK7 15 Car call 18 * 32 FK8 16 Car call 19 * 33 203 / +24V 17 Car call 20 * 34 500 / Ground
* Default set-up
Pin ST3 Pin ST3 1 Zone signal S71 6 Phone connection T1 2 Zone signal S72 7 Phone connection T2 3 NL+ / emerg. light + 8 Phone connection T3 4 NL- / emerg. light- 9 Phone connection T4 5 AC / Alarm push button 10 Phone connection T5
III / 32 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
4.10 Car module FKF 40
X
Y
201
501
5V
RUN
SYS
ON
TERM
OFF
1 2 3 4
ON
FKF 4D 1.0404.01.00
AB
C
D
G
LT LT LS
F E
E
A To guarantee an error-free connection to the BST 40, the switches must be set as stated above!
1 2 3 4
ON
OFF ON
B Delete key: The function is not currently utilised.
C The program version and the date can be change!
D Displays:
• LED 5V comes on: The power supply for the logic components is present. • LED RUN flashes: The module is ready for operation. • LED SYS comes on: The delete key has been actuated.
E Ribbon cable to interface-modules; for the connection between FKF and the interface-modules, only the attached ribbon cable is to be used. Do not lengthen the cable.
F Bus-termination, the jumper must be in the ON position!
G Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
* default set-up see chap. interface modules
Function: Door open/close, shaft copier, inspection, car calls, door open/close push button, ...
Mount. location: car Interface modules: IM 40 – 01, - 03, - 10, -11, -12
Term. Power supply Term. Network interface 201 +24V LT Connection, network, control 501 Ground LT Connection, network, control LS Shielding, network, control
Diameters: X Y Height* Height** * incl. plastic panel
93 mm 130 mm 45 mm 52 mm ** incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
06-04-27 III / 33
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.11 Hall lantern module WFA 40
5V
RUN
SYS1 2 3 4
ON
500
200
21w
22w
23w
24w
25w
26w
27w
28w
21u
22u
23u
24u
25u
26u
27u
28u
WFA
4D
1.
0001
.01.
99
X
Y
BA
D
C
LTLTLS
A To guarantee an error-free connection to the BST 40, the switches must be set as stated above!
1 2 3 4
ON
OFF ON
B Displays:
• LED 5V comes on: The power supply for the logic components is present. • LED RUN flashes: The module is ready for operation. • LED SYS comes on: The delete key has been actuated.
C Delete key: The function is not currently utilised.
D The program version and the date can be changed!
Term. Power supply Term. Network interface 200 +24V LT Connection, network, control 500 Ground LT Connection, network, control LS Shielding, network, control
Term. Hall lantern up Term. Hall lantern down 21w Floor 1 21u Floor 1 22w Floor 2 22u Floor 2 23w Floor 3 23u Floor 3 24w Floor 4 24u Floor 4 25w Floor 5 25u Floor 5 26w Floor 6 26u Floor 6 27w Floor 7 27u Floor 7 28w Floor 8 28u Floor 8
III / 34 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
Term. Outputs 21-28 Output: 24 V / max. 280 mA
The outputs are short circuit and over load resistant.
Diameters: X Y Height* Height** * incl. plastic panel
93 mm 135 mm 45 mm 52 mm ** incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
06-04-27 III / 35
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.12 Interface module IM 40 – 01 / 1,5 qmm
The assembly is used to connect signals (copying, internal calls, ....) to the FKF 40 and FKI. The terminals are useable for line wire up to 1,5 mm².
202
12A
12B
13A
13B
71 72 502
24V
TE1
TE2
TE3
TE4
202
202
502
502
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
60 60A
60B
63 260
202
502
502
D9
D10
TA1
TA2
202
202
502
502
71 72
A
XY
A
B
A Ribbon cable connection to module FKF 40 / FKI
B LED 24V comes on: The working voltage is present.
Term. Copier signals 202 +24V 12A Impulse/Level Up 12B Impulse/Level Down 13A Correction top 13B Correction bottom 71 Zone-signal S71 72 Zone-signal S72 502 Ground
Term. Free programmable outputs Term. Car call A1 Door contr. open door 1 * R1 Car call 1 A2 Door contr. close door 1 * R2 Car call 2 A3 Door contr. open door 2 * R3 Car call 3 A4 Door contr. close door 2 * R4 Car call 4 A5 Shutdown light off * R5 Car call 5 A6 Fan output * R6 Car call 6 A7 free * R7 Car call 7 A8 free * R8 Car call 8
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
III / 36 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Display segment E1 Photocell door 1 * D1 Display segment 1 * E2 Press. contact door 1 * D2 Display segment 2 * E3 Open limit switch door 1 * D3 Display segment 3 * E4 Close limit switch door 1 * D4 Display segment 4 * E5 Photocell door 2 * D5 Display segment 5 * E6 Press. contact door 2 * D6 Display segment 6 * E7 Open limit switch door 2 * D7 Display segment 7 * E8 Close limit switch door 2 * D8 Display segment 8 *
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI * Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
Term. Inspection, Power supply, .... Term. Travel direction, Power supply,... 60 Inspection D9 Arrow-up **
60A Inspection travel up D10 Arrow-down ** 60B Inspection travel down TA1 Overload * 63 Overload (input) TA2 Free * 260 +24V (Inspection) 202 +24V 202 +24V 202 +24V 502 Ground 502 Ground 502 Ground 502 Ground
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed; * Def. set-up FKI and FKF 40
Term. Zone Term. Free programmable inputs, Power supply 71 bridged int. with term. S71 (only clamping point!) TE1 Door open push button door 1 * 72 bridged int. with term. S72 (only clamping point!) TE2 Door close push button door 1 * TE3 Landing control off * TE4 Fan push button* (FKI : set up “free”) 202 +24V 202 +24V 502 Ground 502 Ground
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set
input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
Diameters: X Y Height* Height** *incl. plastic panel
95 mm 126 mm 40 mm 45 mm **incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
06-04-27 III / 37
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.13 Interface module IM 40 – 01 / 2,5 qmm
The assembly is used to connect signals (copying, internal calls, ....) to the FKF 40 and FKI. The terminals are useable for line wire up to 2,5 mm².
A
A
XY
202
12A
12B
13A
13B
71 72 502
24V
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
60 60A
60B
63 260
502
71 72
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
B
D9
D10
TA1
TA2
TE1
TE2
TE3
TE4
A Ribbon cable connection to module FKF 40 / FKI
B LED 24V comes on: The working voltage is present.
Term. Copier signals 202 +24V 12A Impulse/Level up 12B Impulse/Level down 13A Correction top 13B Correction bottom 71 Zone-signal S71 72 Zone-signal S72 502 Ground
Term. Free programmable outputs Term. Car call A1 door contr. open door 1 * R1 Car call 1 ** A2 door contr. close door 1 * R2 Car call 2 ** A3 door contr. open door 2 * R3 Car call 3 ** A4 door contr. close door 2 * R4 Car call 4 ** A5 Shutdown light off * R5 Car call 5 ** A6 Fan output * R6 Car call 6 ** A7 Free * R7 Car call 7 ** A8 Free * R8 Car call 8 **
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI ** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed
III / 38 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Display segment E1 Photocell door 1 * D1 Display segment 1 * E2 Press. contact door 1 * D2 Display segment 2 * E3 Open limit switch door 1 * D3 Display segment 3 * E4 Close limit switch door 1 * D4 Display segment 4 * E5 Photocell door 2 * D5 Display segment 5 * E6 Press. contact door 2 * D6 Display segment 6 * E7 Open limit switch door 2 * D7 Display segment 7 * E8 Close limit switch door 2 * D8 Display segment 8 *
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI * Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI Term. Inspection, Power supply, .... Term. Travel direction, free progr. term. 60 Inspection D9 Arrow-up **
60A Inspection travel up D10 Arrow-down ** 60B Inspection travel down TA1 Overload * 63 Overload (input) TA2 Free * 260 +24V (Inspection) TE1 Door open push button door 1 * 502 Ground TE2 Door close push button door 1 * 71 bridged int. with term. S71 (only clamping point!) TE3 Landing control off * 72 bridged int. with term. S72 (only clamping point!) TE4 Fan push button* (FKI : set up “free”)
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed; * Def. set-up FKF 40 and FKI Term. Power supply Term. Power supply 202 +24V 502 Ground 202 +24V 502 Ground 202 +24V 502 Ground 202 +24V 502 Ground 202 +24V 502 Ground 202 +24V 502 Ground 202 +24V 502 Ground 202 +24V 502 Ground
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set
input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
Diameters: X Y Height* Height** *incl. plastic panel
100 mm 126 mm 40 mm 45 mm **incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
06-04-27 III / 39
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.14 Interface module IM 40 – 03 / 2,5 qmm
The assembly is used to connect signals (copying, internal calls, ....) to the FKF 40 and FKI. The terminals are useable for line wire up to 2,5 mm². The connections ST1 / ST2 are used for cabin-panel that can be plugged. Further the signals D8 and call 8 are available (see modules IM 40 –10 / ...).
202
12A
12B
13A
13B
71 72 502
24V
ST2
ST1
1
34
34
1
A
XY
A
B
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 ALQ
AN
OA
C
60 60A
60B
63 260
502
71 72K
L1K
L250
250
250
250
250
250
2
202
202
202
202
202
202
NL+
NL-
R D1234567
D9D10
TA2TE1TE2TE3
D
1
10
C
ST3
TA1
8 TE4
A Ribbon cable connection to module FKF 40 / FKI
B LED 24V comes on: The working voltage is present.
C Connection to module W40-IF
D Measuring point for the signals of ribbon cable ST1/ST2 (car call panel).
Term. Copier signals 202 +24V 12A Impulse/Level up 12B Impulse/Level down 13A Correction top 13B Correction bottom 71 Zone-signal S71 72 Zone-signal S72 502 Ground
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Free programmable outputs E1 Photocell door 1 * A1 Door contr. open door 1 * E2 Press. contact door 1 * A2 Door contr. close door 1 * E3 Open limit switch door 1 * A3 Door contr. open door 2 * E4 Close limit switch door 1 * A4 Door contr. close door 2 * E5 Photocell door 2 * A5 Shutdown light off * E6 Press. contact door 2 * A6 Fan output * E7 Open limit switch door 2 * A7 Free * E8 Close limit switch door 2 * A8 Free *
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI * Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
III / 40 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
Term. Inspection, , .... Term. Emerg. call / Alarm 60 Inspection T1 Phone connection T1
60A Inspection travel up T2 Phone connection T2 60B Inspection travel down T3 Phone connection T3 63 Overload (input) T4 Phone connection T4 260 +24V (Inspection) T5 Phone connection T5 502 Ground ALQ Alarm acknowledgement 71 Zone signal S71 ANO Alarm push button 72 Zone signal S72 AC Alarm push button
Term. Power supply, emerg. light Term. Free terminal, power supply 202 + 24V KL1 (free, not programable) 202 KL2 (free, not programable) 202 502 Ground 202 502 202 502 202 502 NL+ Emerg. light + 502 NL- Emerg. light - 502
Pin Ribbon cable connection ST1 Pin Ribbon cable connection ST1 1 502 / Ground 18 D7 / Display segment 7 * 2 202 / +24V 19 D9 / Arrow - up ** 3 Car call 1 ** 20 D10 / Arrow – down ** 4 Car call 2 ** 21 TA1 / Overload (output)* 5 Car call 3 ** 22 TE3 / Landing control off * 6 Car call 4 ** 23 Phone connection T1 7 Car call 5 ** 24 Phone connection T2 8 Car call 6 ** 25 Phone connection T3 9 Car call 7 ** 26 Phone connection T4 10 TE1 / door open push button 1 * 27 Phone connection T5 11 TE2 / door close push button 1 * 28 ALQ / Alarm acknowledgement 12 D1 / Display segment 1 * 29 ANO / Alarm push button 13 D2 / Display segment 2 * 30 AC / Alarm push button 14 D3 / Display segment 3 * 31 NL+ / emerg. light + 15 D4 / Display segment 4 * 32 NL- / emerg. light - 16 D5 / Display segment 5 * 33 202 / +24V 17 D6 / Display segment 6 * 34 502 / Ground
Pin Ribbon cable connection ST2 Pin Ribbon cable connection ST2 1 502 / Ground 25 E8 2 202 / +24V 26 KL1 3 Car call 8 ** 27 KL2 4-9 n. c. 28 A8 10 TE4 29 A6 11-20 n. c. 30 A7 21 TA2 31-32 n. c. 22 D8 / Display segment 8 * 33 202 / +24V 23 E6 34 502 / Ground 24 E7
** Default set-up FKI; set up FKF 40 fixed; * default set up FKF 40 and FKI
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set
input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
06-04-27 III / 41
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
Pin ST3 Pin ST3 1 Zone signal S71 6 Phone connection T1 2 Zone signal S72 7 Phone connection T2 3 NL+ / emerg. light + 8 Phone connection T3 4 NL- / emerg. light- 9 Phone connection T4 5 AC / Alarm push button 10 Phone connection T5
Diameters: X Y Höhe* Höhe** *incl. plastic panel
100 mm 126 mm 40 mm 45 mm **incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
4.15 Interface module IM 40 – 10 / 1,5 qmm
The assembly is used to connect signals (copying, internal calls, ....) to the FKF 40 and FKI. The terminals are useable for line wire up to 1,5 mm². The connections ST1 / ST2 are used for cabin-panel that can be plugged.
202
12A
12B
13A
13B
71 72 502
24V
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 ALQ
AN
OA
C
71 72 NL+
NL-
202
202
502
502
60 60A
60B
63 260
202
502
502
ST2
ST11
34
34
1
A
X
Y
A
B
A Ribbon cable connection to module FKF 40 / FKI
B LED 24V comes on: The working voltage is present.
Term. Copier signals Term. Inspection, Power supply, .... 202 +24V 60 Inspection 12A Impulse/Level up 60A Inspection travel up 12B Impulse/Level down 60B Inspection travel down 13A Correction top 63 Overload (input) 13B Correction bottom 260 +24V (Inspection) 71 Zone-signal S71 202 +24V 72 Zone-signal S72 502 Ground 502 Ground 502 Ground
III / 42 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Free programmable outputs E1 Photocell door 1 * A1 Door contr. open door 1 * E2 Press. contact door 1 * A2 Door contr. close door 1 * E3 Open limit switch door 1 * A3 Door contr. open door 2 * E4 Close limit switch door 1 * A4 Door contr. close door 2 * E5 Photocell door 2 * A5 Shutdown light off * E6 Press. contact door 2 * A6 Fan output * E7 Open limit switch door 2 * A7 Free * E8 Close limit switch door 2 * A8 Free *
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI * Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
Term. Remote alarm / Alarm Term. Zone, Emergency light T1 Phone connection T1 71 bridged int. with term. S71 (only clamping point!) T2 Phone connection T2 72 bridged int. with term. S72 (only clamping point!) T3 Phone connection T3 NL+ Emergency light + T4 Phone connection T4 NL- Emergency light - T5 Phone connection T5 ALQ Alarm acknowledgement ANO Alarm push button AC Alarm push button
Pin Ribbon cable ST1 / ST2 Pin Ribbon cable ST1 / ST2 1 502 / Ground 18 D7 / Display segment 7 * 2 202 / +24V 19 D9 / Arrow – up ** 3 Car call 1 ** 20 D10 / Arrow – down ** 4 Car call 2 ** 21 TA1 / Overload (output)* 5 Car call 3 ** 22 TE3 / Landing control off * 6 Car call 4 ** 23 Phone connection T1 7 Car call 5 ** 24 Phone connection T2 8 Car call 6 ** 25 Phone connection T3 9 Car call 7 ** 26 Phone connection T4 10 TE1 / door open push button door 1* 27 Phone connection T5 11 TE2 / door close push button door 1* 28 ALQ / Alarm acknowledgement 12 D1 / Display segment 1 * 29 ANO / Alarm push button 13 D2 / Display segment 2 * 30 AC / Alarm push button 14 D3 / Display segment 3 * 31 NL+ / Emergency light + 15 D4 / Display segment 4 * 32 NL- / Emergency light - 16 D5 / Display segment 5 * 33 202 / +24V 17 D6 / Display segment 6 * 34 502 / Ground
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed * Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set
input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
Diameters: X Y Height* Height** *incl. plastic panel
95 mm 126 mm 40 mm 45 mm **incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
06-04-27 III / 43
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.16 Interface module IM 40 – 10 / 2,5 qmm
The assembly is used to connect signals (copying, internal calls, ....) to the FKF 40 and FKI. The terminals are useable for line wire up to 2,5 mm². The connections ST1 / ST2 are used for cabin-panel that can be plugged.
202
12A
12B
13A
13B
71 72 502
24V
ST2
ST1
1
34
34
1
A
XY
A
B
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 ALQ
AN
OA
C
60 60A
60B
63 260
502
71 72N
L-50
250
250
250
250
250
250
2
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
NL+
R D1234567
D9D10
TA1TE1TE2TE3
D
1
10
C
ST3
A Ribbon cable connection to module FKF 40 / FKI
B LED 24V comes on: The working voltage is present.
C Ribbon cable connection to module W 40-IF
D Messurepoints for the signals of ST1/ST2
Term. Copier signals 202 +24V 12A Impulse/Level up 12B Impulse/Level down 13A Correction top 13B Correction bottom 71 Zone-signal S71 72 Zone-signal S72 502 Ground
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Free programmable outputs E1 Photocell door 1 * A1 Door contr. open door 1 * E2 Press. contact door 1 * A2 Door contr. close door 1 * E3 Open limit switch door 1 * A3 Door contr. open door 2 * E4 Close limit switch door 1 * A4 Door contr. close door 2 * E5 Photocell door 2 * A5 Shutdown light off * E6 Press. contact door 2 * A6 Fan output * E7 Open limit switch door 2 * A7 Free * E8 Close limit switch door 2 * A8 Free *
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI * Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
III / 44 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
Term. Inspection, Zone, ... Term. Remote alarm / Alarm 60 Inspection T1 Phone connection T1
60A Inspection travel up T2 Phone connection T2 60B Inspection travel down T3 Phone connection T3 63 Overload (input) T4 Phone connection T4 260 +24V (Inspection) T5 Phone connection T5 502 Ground ALQ Alarm acknowledgement 71 Zone-signal S71 ANO Alarm push button 72 Zone-signal S72 AC Alarm push button
Term. Power supply, Emergency light Term. Emergency light, Power supply 202 + 24V NL- Emergency light - 202 502 Ground 202 502 202 502 202 502 202 502 202 502 NL+ Emergency light + 502
Pin Ribbon cable ST1 / ST2 Pin Ribbon cable ST1 / ST2 1 502 / Ground 18 D7 / Display segment 7 * 2 202 / +24V 19 D9 / Arrow – up ** 3 Car call 1 ** 20 D10 / Arrow – down ** 4 Car call 2 ** 21 TA1 / Overload (output)* 5 Car call 3 ** 22 TE3 / Landing control off * 6 Car call 4 ** 23 Phone connection T1 7 Car call 5 ** 24 Phone connection T2 8 Car call 6 ** 25 Phone connection T3 9 Car call 7 ** 26 Phone connection T4 10 TE1 / door open push button door 1 * 27 Phone connection T5 11 TE2 / door close push button door 1 * 28 ALQ / Alarm acknowledgement 12 D1 / Display segment 1 * 29 ANO / Alarm push button 13 D2 / Display segment 2 * 30 AC / Alarm push button 14 D3 / Display segment 3 * 31 NL+ / Emergency light + 15 D4 / Display segment 4 * 32 NL- / Emergency light - 16 D5 / Display segment 5 * 33 202 / +24V 17 D6 / Display segment 6 * 34 502 / Ground
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed * Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set
input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
Pin ST3 Pin ST3 1 Zonesignal S71 6 Phone connection T1 2 Zonesignal S72 7 Phone connection T2 3 NL+ / Emergency light + 8 Phone connection T3 4 NL- / Emergency light - 9 Phone connection T4 5 AC / Alarm push button 10 Phone connection T5
Diameters: X Y Height* Height** *incl. plastic panel
100 mm 126 mm 40 mm 45 mm **incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
06-04-27 III / 45
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.17 Interface module IM 40 – 11 / 1,5 qmm
The assembly is used to connect signals (copying, internal calls, ....) to the FKF 40 and FKI. The terminals are useable for line wire up to 1,5 mm². You can partially connect the signals via Ultrex connectors.
A
X
YDIS1:
DIS2:
2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 7 9
2 31
ULTREX:
502
202
D1...
D10
C20
212
A12
B13
A13
B71 72 50
2
24V
DIS1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
60 60A
60B
63 260
202
502
502
D0
ALQ
AN
OA
CN
L+N
L-
71 72
R1 R2
R3 R4
R5 R6
R7 R8
TE1 TE2
TE3 TE4
TA1
TA2
NL
AL
DIS2
A
B
A Ribbon cable connection to module FKF 40 / FKI
B LED 24V comes on: The working voltage is present.
C Set-up of the ULTREX-terminals: PIN R1-TA2 AL NL
1 Ground ALQ (n.c.) 2 Outp./inp. ANO NL+ 3 + 24V AC NL-
Term. Copier signals Term. Free programmable outputs 202 +24V A1 Door contr. open door 1 * 12A Impulse/Level up A2 Door contr. close door 1 * 12B Impulse/Level down A3 Door contr. open door 2 * 13A Correction top A4 Door contr. close door 2 * 13B Correction bottom A5 Shutdown light off * 71 Zone-signal S71 A6 Fan output * 72 Zone-signal S72 A7 Free * 502 Ground A8 Free *
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Inspection, Power supply, .... E1 Photocell door 1 * 60 Inspection E2 Press. contact door 1 * 60A Inspection travel up E3 Open limit switch door 1 * 60B Inspection travel down E4 Close limit switch door 1 * 63 Overload (input) E5 Photocell door 2 * 260 +24V (Inspection) E6 Press. contact door 2 * 202 +24V E7 Open limit switch door 2 * 502 Ground E8 Close limit switch door 2 * 502 Ground
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
III / 46 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
Term. Alarm, ... ALQ Alarm acknowledgement ANO Alarm push button AC Alarm push button NL+ Emergency light + NL- Emergency light - D0 bridged int. with Pin10 DIS2 (only clamping point!) 71 bridged int. with term. S71 (only clamping point!) 72 bridged int. with term. S72 (only clamping point!)
Ultrex Car call Ultrex Free progr. inputs, Power supply R1 Car call 1 ** TE1 Door open push button door 1 * R2 Car call 2 ** TE2 Door close push button door 1 * R3 Car call 3 ** TE3 Landing control off * R4 Car call 4 ** TE4 Fan push button * (FKI: set up “Free”) R5 Car call 5 ** TA1 Overload * R6 Car call 6 ** TA2 Free * R7 Car call 7 ** NL Emergency light R8 Car call 8 ** AL Alarm
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed * Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
Ultrex DIS1 Micro-Match
DIS2 (for indicator comp. W. Schäfer)
502 Power supply ground 1 202 / Power supply +24V (1,5 A) D1 Display segment 1 * 2 D1 / Address 0 D2 Display segment 2 * 3 D2 / Address 1 D3 Display segment 3 * 4 D3 / Address 2 D4 Display segment 4 * 5 D4 / Address 3 D5 Display segment 5 * 6 D5 / Address 4 D6 Display segment 6 * 7 D9 / Arrow-up ** D7 Display segment 7 * 8 D10 / Arrow-down ** D8 Display segment 8 * 9 502 / Power supply ground D9 Arrow-up ** 10 Bridged int. with term. D0 / signal „travel“ D10 Arrow-down ** 202 Power supply +24V (1,5 A)
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed * Default set-up FKI and FKF40
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set
input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
Diameters: X Y Height* Height** *incl. plastic panel
95 mm 126 mm 40 mm 45 mm **incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
06-04-27 III / 47
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.18 Interface module IM 40 – 12 / 2,5 qmm
The assembly is used to connect signals (copying, internal calls, ....) to the FKF 40 and FKI. The terminals are useable for line wire up to 2,5 mm². You can partially connect the signals via Micro-Match connectors.
A
A
X
Y20
212
A12
B13
A13
B71 72 50
2
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
60 60A
60B
63 260
502
71 72 TE3
TE4
TA2
ALQ
AN
OA
CN
L+N
L-
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
B
R1 R2 R3
R4
R7
R5 R6
R8
TE1
NL1
AL1
TE2 TA1
DS13
24
1
1112
2
C
A Ribbon cable connection to module FKF 40 / FKI
B LED 24V comes on: The working voltage is present.
C System of the Micro-Match-terminals
Term. Copier signals Term. Free programmable outputs 202 +24V A1 Door contr. open door 1 * 12A Impulse/Level up A2 Door contr. close door 1 * 12B Impulse/Level down A3 Door contr. open door 2 * 13A Correction top A4 Door contr. close door 2 * 13B Correction bottom A5 Shutdown light off * 71 Zone-signal S71 A6 Fan output * 72 Zone-signal S72 A7 Free * 502 Ground A8 Free *
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
III / 48 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Inspection, Power supply, .... E1 Photocell door 1 * 60 Inspection E2 Press. contact door 1 * 60A Inspection travel up E3 Open limit switch door 1 * 60B Inspection travel down E4 Close limit switch door 1 * 63 Overload (input) E5 Photocell door 2 * 260 +24V (Inspection) E6 Press. contact door 2 * 502 Ground E7 Open limit switch door 2 * 71 Zone-signal S71 E8 Close limit switch door 2 * 72 Zone-signal S72
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
Term. Power supply Term. Power supply 202 + 24V 502 Ground 202 502 202 502 202 502 202 502 202 502 202 502 202 502
Micro-Match
Car call Micro-Match
Free programmable inputs, Power supply
R1 Car call 1 ** TE1 Door open push button door 1 * R2 Car call 2 ** TE2 Door close push button door 1 * R3 Car call 3 ** TA1 Overload * R4 Car call 4 ** NL1 Emergency light R5 Car call 5 ** AL1 Alarm R6 Car call 6 ** R7 Car call 7 ** R8 Car call 8 **
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed * Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
Micro-Match
DS Micro-Match
DS
1 Power supply +24V (1,5 A) 7 Display segment 4 (A4) * 2 Arrow-down ** 8 Display segment 5 (A3) * 3 Arrow-up ** 9 Display segment 6 (A2) * 4 Display segment 1 (A7) * 10 Display segment 7 (A1) * 5 Display segment 2 (A6) * 11 Display segment 8 (A0) * 6 Display segment 3 (A5) * 12 Power supply ground
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed * Default set-up FKI and FKF40
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set
input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
Diameters: X Y Height* Height** *incl. plastic panel
95 mm 126 mm 40 mm 45 mm **incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
06-04-27 III / 49
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
4.19 Interface module IM 40 - V.24
The assembly expands the BST 40 / 400 by a V.24 interface (terminals: TDA, 0VA, RDA). Therefore, a printer can be connected or a remote data transmission connection is possible.
E1
E3
TDA
0VA
RD
A
E2
BST 40
A
B
C
J1J2J3
TDA
0VA
RD
A
BST 400
C
AB
A Interface module IM 40 – V.24 (serial interface)
B Fitted with soldering side upwards
C Socket for IM 40 – V.24
III / 50 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
4.20 Interface module W 40 – IF 002
The assembly is used to connect signals of the trailer cable with terminals in the inspection box.
X
Y
1
10 B
N
L11
L12
L13
501201LT+LT-63
60C7172
102103103T1T2T3T4T5
102FR1FR1FR2FR3FR4FR5FR6FR7
101
L5 L5 L5 L5 L5L7 L7 L8 L8
N4
N4
N4
N4
N4
A
A Connections to trailer cable
B Connections to module IM 40 – 10 / 2,5 qmm
Term. Doormotor L13 Doormotor/doorcontroller L12 Doormotor L11 Doormotor N N
Term. Term. FR7 Free T5 Phone connection T5 FR6 Free T4 Phone connection T4 FR5 Free T3 Phone connection T3 FR4 Free T2 Phone connection T2 FR3 Free T1 Phone connection T1 FR2 Free 103 Emergency call FR1 Free 103 Emergency call FR1 Free 102 Emergency light - 101 Emergency light + 102 Emergency light -
Term. 72 Zonesignal S71 71 Zonesignal S72 FR8 Free 63 Free LT- Network, connection LT+ Network, connection 201 + 24V 501 0V (ground)
06-04-27 III / 51
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
Pin Ribbon cable connection Pin Ribbon cable connection 1 Zonesignal S71 6 Phone connection T1 2 Zonesignal S72 7 Phone connection T2 3 NL+ / emergency light + 8 Phone connection T3 4 NL- / emergency light - 9 Phone connection T4 5 AC / alarm push button 10 Phone connection T5
Term. L7 Push button shaftlight L7 L8 Push button shaftlight L8
Term. Term. N4 N (Cabin light) L5 Cabin light N4 L5 N4 L5 N4 L5 N4 L5
Diameters: X Y Height* Height** *incl. plastic panel
95 mm 128 mm 41 mm 45 mm **incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting and ribbon cable to trailer cable
III / 52 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
5 Technical data 5.1 Power supply MPK
MPK 40 MPK 400 MPK 4000
UInput 24 [VDC] 24 [VDC] 18 [VAC] 20 [VAC]
IInput [A] 3,15 3,15 1,5 3
Voltage tolerance of the power supply: + 10% until -20%
5.2 Power supply control (24 VDC)
Type MPK 40 MPK 400 MPK 4000 min. / typ. / max. min. / typ. / max. min. / typ. / max.
Term. 200 UOutput [VDC] 19,2 / 24 / 28
Term. 200 IOutput [A] 1 1 1,8
Term. 201 UOutput [VDC] 19,2 / 24 / 28
Term. 201 IOutput [A] 1,5 1,5 1,8
Term. 207 UOutput [VDC] 19,2 / 24 / 28 - -
Term. 207 IOutput [A] 1,5 - -
Main- and extension modules (HK 24 / EK 08 / EK 24): Type min. / typ. / max.
Term. 210 UOutput [VDC] 19,2 / 24 / 28
Term. 210 IOutput [mA] 250
Term. 202 IOutput [mA] 1500
Term. 203 IOutput [mA] 1500
The outputs are short circuit and over load resistant.
[mA] [mA]
5.3 Drawing of current (modules) Type Type
Extension module EM 16C 55 – max. 2000 100 - 1500 FKI
Mainmodule (HK 24) 55 – 2000 55 – 1500 FKF 40
Extension modules (EK24 / 08) 25 – 2000 55 – 800 WFA 40
ETG-B004 30 – 1600 120- 3000 FKP
5.4 Monitoring PTC
Ron – off [KΩ]
Ron - off [KΩ] I [mA]
min. / typ. / max. min. / typ. / max.
1,75 / 1,8 / 1,85 2,25 / 2,3 / 2,35 0,65
06-04-27 III / 53
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Technical description
5.5 Inputs
Type MPK 40 MPK 400 MPK 4000 min. / typ. / max. min. / typ. / max. min. / typ. / max.
Standard and call Uoff [VDC] 0 / 0 / 5
Standard and call Ioff [mA] 0 / 0 / 2
Standard and call Uon [VDC] 15 / 24 / 28
Standard and call Ion [mA] - / 7 / - - / 10,5 / -
BST terminal E1 Ion [mA] - / 12 / - - / 40 / - - / 22 / -
BST terminal E2 Ion [mA] - / 12 / - - / 40 / - - / 15,5 / -
BST terminal E3 Ion [mA] - / 12 / - - / 40 / - - / 10,5 / -
Pol. saf. cir. 230 VAC Uoff [VAC] 0 / 0 / 120
Pol. saf. cir. 230 VAC Ioff [mA] 0 / 0 / 1,6
Pol. saf. cir. 230 VAC Uon [VAC] 175 / 230 / -
Pol. saf. cir. 230 VAC Ion [mA] - / 3,4 / -
MPK 400/4000: ETGB004 standard and calls Ion : 7 mA
5.6 Outputs
Type (min. / typ. / max.)
Standard / calls Uoutput [VDC] 15 / 24 / 28
Type BST 40 BST 400 BST 4000 HK FKF 40 FKI/FKP WFA 40
Standard Ioutput [mA] 100 280 90 - 280 280 250
Calls Ioutput [mA] 100 280 250 280 280 250 -
Type EM 16C ETGB 004
Standard Ioutput [mA] 280
Calls Ioutput [mA] 280 100
ETGB004: Ioutput A 2, A 3: 100 mA; A 5, A 6, A 7, A 8: 250 mA
The outputs are short circuit and over load resistant.
III / 54 06-04-27
MPK 40 / 400 / 4000
Technical description
6 Overview of the modules in the MPK-Systems
MPK
Module Function 40 400 4000
BSTV 40 Relay module −
BSTV Relay module − −
EM 16C Extension inputs/outputs BST 400 − −
ETG-B004 Landing calls / floor −
ETG M24 Landing calls / floor −
IKL M24 Any input-/output functions −
IRP M24 Car call, door −
FKF M24 Copier, inspection, door −
FKF 40 Copier, inspection, door, car calls − −
FKI Copier, inspection, door, car calls −
FKP Copier, inspection, door, car calls − −
WFA 40 Hall lantern − −
IM 40 – 01 / 1,5 Interface module FKF 40 / FKI
IM 40 – 01 / 2,5 Interface module FKF 40 / FKI
IM 40 – 03 / 2,5 Interface module FKF 40 / FKI
IM 40 – 10 / 1,5 Interface module FKF 40 / FKI
IM 40 – 10 / 2,5 Interface module FKF 40 / FKI
IM 40 – 11 / 1,5 Interface module FKF 40 / FKI
IM 40 – 12 / 2,5 Interface module FKF 40 / FKI
IM 40 – V.24 Interface module (serial port) −
W 40 – IF 002 Interface module trailer cable
available; - not available
06-04-27 III / 55
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH KOLLMORGEN (UK) Ltd.
Broichstrasse 32 Unit 17, St. Asaph Business Park
D-51109 Cologne St. Asaph, Denbighshire LL17OLJ
Telefon +49 (0) 221 89 85 0 United Kingdom
Telefax +49 (0) 221 89 85 30 Telephone 0044-1745-585558
http://www.kollmorgen.de Fax 0044-1745-585828
Email [email protected] Email [email protected]
© KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 06-04-28 / DO_DS4HK_GB.doc
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
Contents
1 Short introduction............................................................................................................. 3 2 Commissioning ................................................................................................................. 5
2.1 Checking the connections of the signals.................................................................................5 2.2 Checking the basic settings ......................................................................................................5 2.3 Entering the travel height ..........................................................................................................5 2.4 Setting the speed of the learning travel ...................................................................................5 2.5 Starting the learning travel ........................................................................................................6 2.6 Setting the cut-off points for the various speeds....................................................................6
2.6.1 Cut-off point <<v-fast>>.........................................................................................................7 2.6.2 Cut-off point <<v-intermediate>>...........................................................................................8 2.6.3 Cut-off point <<v-slow>> .......................................................................................................8 2.6.4 Direct entry (reference point output)......................................................................................9
2.7 Setting the min. distance for starting with <<v-fast>> or <<v-intermediate>>......................9 2.8 Measuring the floor level difference .......................................................................................10 2.9 Enter the floor level difference................................................................................................11 2.10 Correction the floor level values ............................................................................................11 2.11 Setting the relevelling ranges .................................................................................................12 2.12 Activating the relevelling.........................................................................................................13 2.13 Cecklists of the Commissioning.............................................................................................13
2.13.1 Checklist for learning travels .............................................................................................13 2.13.2 Checklist for correcting floor level values ..........................................................................15 2.13.3 Checklist for releveling settings .........................................................................................16
3 Diagnostic........................................................................................................................ 16 3.1 Function <<Stop position>> ....................................................................................................16 3.2 Function <<Resolution>> ........................................................................................................16 3.3 Function <<Valid learn. travel>>, <<Act. learning travel>>...................................................17
4 Level offset supervise .................................................................................................... 17 4.1 Function <<level offset tolerance>> .......................................................................................17 4.2 Function <<level offset limit>>................................................................................................17 4.3 Function <<level offset handling>> ........................................................................................17
5 Appendix.......................................................................................................................... 18 5.1 Position graph ..........................................................................................................................18 5.2 Configuration of the Digital Selector (DSC) ...........................................................................19 5.3 DSC connection types .............................................................................................................20 5.4 Overview of the DSC module ..................................................................................................21 5.5 Description of the DSC LED´s .................................................................................................21 5.6 Selecting the incremental encoder and speed governor ......................................................22 5.7 Notes on signal routing ...........................................................................................................22
IV / 2 06-04-28
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
1 Short introduction
1 Check this signal connections. ( Chapt. 2.1)
shaft copier signals
82
13 B
13 A
15 A**
15 B**
S 71
S 72*
83 84 A1*E2E3
* only by <<safety circuit>> ** <<pre-limit switch>> only by “short distances” at top- / bottom- level
Terminals (control)
2 Check this basic settings. ( Chapt. 2.2)
Basic setting Basic setting Basic setting
Lift Lift Lift
No. of stops Type of selector Type of drive
… Digital selector …
3 Set the travel height. ( Chapt. 2.3)
Settings
Digital selector
Travel height
4 Confirm the sp. of the learning travel. ( Chapt. 2.4)
Settings
Digital selector
Learning travel speed
…
5 Start the learning travel. ( Chapt. 2.5)
Settings
Digital selector
Learning activated
6 Set the cut off points for speeds (Upward-and downward- direction) ( Chapt. 2.6)
Settings Settings Settings
Digital selector Digital selector Digital selector
v- ... off up v- ... off up* v-0 off up
06-04-28 IV / 3
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
7 Set the minimum distances for starting with <<V-fast>> and <<V-intermediate>>
( Chapt. 2.7)
Settings Settings
Digital selector Digital selector
Start speed v-... from * Start speed v-... from *
* These settings are necessary, if the shaft contens "short distances".
8 Drive to each floor in the upward and downward direction. Mearsure the floor level
deviation. (Take care that the relevelling is not active!) ( Chapt. 2.8)
9 Enter the floor level difference (Upward-and downward- direction). ( Chapt. 2.9)
Settings Settings
Digital selector Digital selector
Floor level difference Floor level difference
Lev. 1 down … mm Lev. … down … mm
10 Start the correction of the floor level values. ( Chapt. 2.10)
Settings
Digital selector
Floor level correction
11 Drive to each floor in the upward and downward direction and check the floor level .
Repeat the steps 8 - 10 if necessary.
12 Set the relevelling ranges (Upward-and downward- direction) ( Chapt. 2.11)
Settings Settings
Relevelling Relevelling
Relevelling up on Relevelling up off
Vs. fl. Lev. … mm Vs. fl. Lev. … mm
13 Set the function to <<Yes>>. ( Chapt. 2.12)
Settings
Relevelling
Active
YES
IV / 4 06-04-28
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
2 Commissioning
Please note that the DSC already contains some data as a result of works tests (e.g. travel height used for simulation). These values are not default values for the DCS and they must be adjusted to suit the conditions at the site in question.
Switch off the relevelling function for the entire duration of the commissioning procedure (Menu: <<Settings / Relevelling / active / NO>>).
2.1 Checking the connections of the signals
• <<correction->> switches 13A and 13B installed und connected
• short distance at the bottom floor: <<pre-limit->> switch (15B) installed and connected
• short distance at the top floor: <<pre-limit->> switch (15A) installed and connected
• zone switch S71 or S71 & S72 installed and connected (see chapter <<appendix / DSC connection types>> and electrical drawings)
• outputs A/B of the encoder connected (see chapter <<appendix / DSC connection types>> and electrical drawings)
2.2 Checking the basic settings
Before the values for the incremental DSC are set, the configuration of the lift system must be checked using the following basic settings. Changes made under these menu items only become effective after a RESET. Furthermore, the drive values in the main menu <<Settings>> must be matched carefully as they decisively influence the running characteristics.
Check the position of the <<correction->> switches and, when “short floor distance” is indicated at the top/bottom flloors, check also the position of the <<pre-limit->> switches as these switches are used to switch off fast speed during the learning travel. Where <<correction->> and <<pre-limit->> switch signals have been reversed or are missing, check that the lift car moves beyond the terminal floors at the pre-set learning travel speed or at the <<v-slow>> speed!
2.3 Entering the travel height
The travel height is calculated from to the distance between the sill on the lowest floor and the sill on the highest floor.
The travel height should be calculated (in cm) as precisely as possible, as it is used as a basis for determining the resolution of the incremental encoder.
2.4 Setting the speed of the learning travel
Specify the speed of the learning travel. Note that not every drive motor is designed for learning travels at low speed (advised setting <<v-intermediate>>).
Attention: Select <<v-intermediate>> for the learning travel if switches S15A and / or S15B are present.If the learning travel starts with <<v-fast>> (default setting) the lift may overtravel the terminal floors.
06-04-28 IV / 5
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
2.5 Starting the learning travel
The learning travel is for precisely recording the positions of each zone in the shaft (S71 or S71 & S72). It can be activated irrespective of the status of the lift car.
The learning travel consists of three phases:
Phase 1: Travel to the lowest zone if the lift is not already in the zone. Phase 2: Upward travel to highest zone
The start of every zone is registered with the corresponding counter reading (S71 or S71 & S72).
Phase 3: Downward travel to lowest zone
The start of every zone is registered with the corresponding counter reading (S71 or S71 & S72).
The pulses from the incremental encoder and the travel height are used to calculate the encoder’s resolution which is required for subsequent settings. In a first approximation, the DSC positions the floor floor points in the middle of the recorded zones.
After the learning travel has been executed correctly, the message <<Lift ready to travel>> appears on the lift status display.
If the learning travel has been aborted or its results are invalid, the message <<Blocked due to dig. Selector>> appears on the lift status display. The cause of the error is stored in the event log.
The learning travel can be aborted by activating the test/normal switch (inspection). Errors not related to DSC operation (e.g. a lock interruption, tacho fault) also cause the learning travel to be aborted. After an abort, the learning travel cannot be continued, and must be reactivated from the menu.
If the lift has already made a successful learning travel it will keep these values until a full completion of all three phases of a new learning travel overrides them. This keeps the lift ready for operation even when a learning travel is aborted.
A learning travel must always be activated after the positions of the zone magnets in the shaft have been changed.
2.6 Setting the cut-off points for the various speeds
There are three types of slowdown distance <<v-fast off>>, <<v-intermediate off >> and <<v-slow off >> (see chapter <<Appendix / position graph>>).
After the learning travel has been completed successfully, set the slowdown distances for the individual speeds.
In general, excessively large values (in mm’s) for <<v-fast>> and <<v-intermediate>> lead to long levelling distances.
Also large switch off values for <<v-slow>> lead to bad floor levels, such incorrect settings do not cause the lift to produce an uncontrolled stop. But, excessively small values cause overtravels beyond the floor level points and zones. In response to such faults an error will be displayed in the event log.
IV / 6 06-04-28
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
It is advisable to set large slow down distances when commencing DSC installation.
When entering a slowdown distance, you specify a base value. This base value is identical to the corresponding slowdown distances on all levels.
But, you can also set values for individual levels. This value is based on the corresponding base value and is used for fine adjustment of the slowdown distances (see chapter <<Appendix / position graph>>).
Note that any change to the base value causes a change in the corresponding floor values.
The system MPK 400 / 4000 supports up to 5 different driving speeds. In chapters 2, 3 and 4 become the driving speeds (v0 - v5) with <<v-slow>>, <<v- intermediate>>, <<v-fast>> designated.
It exists the following connection:
Number of travel speeds: 1 2 3 4 5
<<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-fast>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v1) <<v-intermed.>> (v1) <<v-intermed.>> (v1) <<v-intermed.>> (v1)
<<v-fast>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v2) <<v-fast>> (v3) <<v-intermed.>> (v3) <<v-intermed.>> (v3) <<v-fast>> (v4) <<v-intermed.>> (v4) <<v-fast>> (v5)
(<<v-slow>> = approach speed; <<v-intermed.>> = intermediate speed)
2.6.1 Cut-off point <<v-fast>>
The slowdown distance can be determined from the graph of the drive. The graph below is an example, it shows the drive’s minimum braking distance according to the deceleration rate.
The base value of <<v-fast off>> is equal to the braking distance of <<v-fast>>!
06-04-28 IV / 7
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
Example of determining the base value of <<v-fast off>> for a “variable freq. AC“ drive:
According to the graph below, the drive has a minimum braking distance of 1.2 m at <<v-fast>> = 1.0 m/s and a deceleration of 0.8 m/s².
1.2 m/s21.0 m/s2
0.8 m/s2
0.6 m/s2
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
m/s
mBraking distance
Speed V-fast
1.2
Diagram of the braking distance
Retardation
The resulting base value for <<v-fast>> is:
Base value <<v-fast off>> = 1.2 m = 1200 mm
• The diagram of the braking distance is valid only for the example! • The deceleration rate or retardation can often be guess work because most motors do not display
the rate of deceleration on the data plate, but for frequency drives such as the Thyssen MFC 16 or the Ziehl-Abegg 2DF show the rates in the parameter settings in m/s². By using this setting you can then set your slowdown distance!
2.6.2 Cut-off point <<v-intermediate>>
When entering the intermediate speed, proceed as in section 2.6.1. and enter the values.
2.6.3 Cut-off point <<v-slow>>
Enter the distance that the lift requires to come to a stop after its approach speed <<v-slow>> has been deactivated. First select identical values for the upward and downward directions.
IV / 8 06-04-28
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
2.6.4 Direct entry (reference point output)
Settings Settings
Digital selector Digital selector
Distance ref. point Output ref. point
From level mm YES
Direct entry allows the lift to approach directly without constantly having to travel at the speed <<v-slow>> (no crawling distance).
Note: The value of the function “cut-off point <<v-slow>>” is not necessary.
The requirements for direct entry are:
1. a frequency-regulated drive
2. the regulator must be able to assess a reference point (check the manufacturer’s information).
You must also enter the value of the distance between the reference point and level (according to the setting on the MPK) in the menu of the regulator.
2.7 Setting the min. distance for starting with <<v-fast>> or <<v-intermediate>>
Depending on the distance to be covered to the destination level, you can specify the most suitable speed for the lift motion.
In doing this you are determining the distances required in order to be able to start the lift at fast speed or at intermediate speed. Use the required braking distances and the acceleration rates given for each speed for the distances.
With reference to the example below, the minimum distance for the lift to accelerate, travel at constant speed, decelerate and stop comfortably is 2.8 meters. Therefore, the parameter value 2800mm is then stored in start speed <<v-fast>> from as a reference for the calculation.
Example:
For the lift to start with <<v-fast>> and correctly process the selected slowing points, the following calculation is made:
Acceleration distance : 1.2 m + Deceleration distance - 1.2 m (see example in 2.6.1.) + <<v-fast>> constant : 0.4 m = Minimum distance of 2.8 m (2800 mm) between two levels
06-04-28 IV / 9
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
For the lift to start with <<v-intermediate>> and correctly process the selected slowing points, the following calculation is made:
Acceleration distance : 0.6 m + Deceleration distance : 0.6 m + <<v-intermediate>> const. : 0.2 m = Minimum distance of 1.4 m (1400 mm) between two levels Enter the calculated minimum distances to be covered in the menu:
Settings Settings
Digital selector Digital selector
Start spd. v1 from Start spd. v2 from
1400 mm 2800 mm
Ensure that the <<Start spd v... from>> functions, i.e. the speeds not used, show the value <<inactive>>.
2.8 Measuring the floor level difference
The DSC is designed to make it as easy as possible to make adjustments to levelling accuracy without adjustments to the shaft magnets.
As described before the DSC sets the floor level in the middle of the measured zone (S71 or S71 & S72) by default. It may then be necessary to change these base values to have correct stopping at each floor. Drive to each floor in the upward and downward directions. Measure the floor level deviation and enter the values separately for each direction of travel in the table provided in the appendix of this manual.
The following chart illustrates the relationship between the actual floor level points and the stopping points for each direction.
ddown
dup
Stopping point duringdownward approach
cut-off point v downward slow
Stopping point duringupward approach
cut-off point v upwardslow
Actual flush position of the level
IV / 10 06-04-28
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
The distances between the actual floor level points and stopping points are defined as dDOWN and dUP for both directions. If the lift stops below the actual floor level point, the measured value is a minus sign. If the lift stops above the actual floor level point, the measured value is a plus sign.
Example of correcting the floor level values:
• Lift with 4 floors
• The base switch off values for <<v-slow off up>> and <<v-slow off down>> is 20 mm from floor level point
The following values of floor level difference have been measured:
Floor Downward approach: ddown Upward approach: dup
1 -5 mm (too low) - 2 +12 mm (too high) +2 mm (too high) 3 -10 mm (too low) -20 mm (too low) 4 - +8 mm (too high)
2.9 Enter the floor level difference
Enter the floor level difference values for every level und for direction up / down.
From the example chap. 2.8:
Settings Settings Settings
Digital selector Digital selector Digital selector
Fl.level difference Fl.level difference Fl.level difference
Fl. 1 down -5 mm Fl. 2 up 2 mm Fl. 2 down 12 mm
After completing all entries, check all these values again to ensure that the correction is performed without any errors. Mind the sign of your measured floor level differences.
2.10 Correction the floor level values
Settings
Digital selector
Fl. level correction
Press OK, the display then shows <<are you sure?>>, press OK and then the system will recalculate the floor levels.
Set the lift “out of action” before you correct the floor level values!
06-04-28 IV / 11
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
2.11 Setting the relevelling ranges
The relevelling function consists of mainly four settings, these are shown below. When the lift moves away from the floor level due to loads moving in and out of the lift car the lift may require to relevel back to floor level.
Enter the relevelling ranges for each direction. The set values apply to all levels (see diagram below).
The following chart shows the relevelling positions.
Zonerange
Zonerange
Floorlevel
Relevelling down on
Relevelling down off
Relevelling up off
Relevelling up on
Example of setting the activation and deactivation values for relevelling:
Relevelling is to be activated in the upward and downward directions 20 mm from the floor level point and deactivated 10 mm from the floor level point.
Relevelling On Off Downward 20 mm 10 mm
Upward 20 mm 10 mm
Settings Settings
Relevelling Relevelling
Relevelling up on Relevelling up on
vs. fl. lev. 20 mm vs. fl. lev. 10 mm
Settings Settings
Relevelling Relevelling
Relevelling down on Relevelling down on
vs. fl. lev. 20 mm vs. fl. lev. 10 mm
Please note that the stopping accuracy in relation to the cutting in and/or cut-off positions for the relevelling facility are dependent on the tolerances of the drive. For this reason, you should set the cut-off positions close to the cutting in positions at the start of calibration. After each relevelling procedure, adjust the cut-off position until the optimum value is reached.
IV / 12 06-04-28
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
2.12 Activating the relevelling
Set the following menu item to "YES".
SettingsRelevellingactiveYES
2.13 Cecklists of the Commissioning
The following checklists supplement the documentation titled Commissioning the Digital Selector. They assist mechanics on-site by providing additional information on commissioning.
2.13.1 Checklist for learning travels
Before beginning a learning travel, clarify the following points.
Are all the shaft signals required for the digital selector present?
• <<correction->> switches Top and Bottom
• At short floor distances in the end floors: the corresponding <<pre-limit->> switches Top and Bottom.
• Zone
Do the zone, <<correction->> and <<pre-limit->> switches operate correctly?
Check the switching response using the test adapter function in the menu or with the help of an actual test adapter.
Are the real floor level positions located in the individual zones?
The real floor level positions should be located in the middle of the individual zones.
Is the distance between the zones in the shaft sufficient?
The following relationship governs the minimum distance between two zones:
min. Zone spacing [m] = 0.05 s * v... (fast)
[m/s]
Example: v... (fast)
= 1.5 m/s
min. Zone spacing = 0.05 s * 1.5 m/s = 0.075 m
Are the zones in the shaft sufficiently long?
The following relationship governs the minimum length of zones:
min. Zone length [m] = (0.8 s * vSlow [m/s] + cut-off travel v
Slow [m]) * 2
condition: min. zone length > 0.05 s * v... (fast)
[m/s]
06-04-28 IV / 13
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
Example: v... (fast)
= 1.5 m/s, vSlow
= 0.15 m/s; Cut-off travel for vSlow
= 0.04 m
min. Zone length = (0.8 s * 0.15 m/s + 0.04 m)*2 = (0.012 m + 0.04 m)*2 = 0.104 m
condition: min. zone length > 0.05 s * 1.5 m/s = 0.075 m
min. zone length 0.104 m > 0.075 m
Are the zones of the end floors located in the respective <<correction->> switch areas?
Only the zone of the end floor must be located in the area of the corresponding <<correction->> switch.
Are the <<correction->> switches set so that the elevator is retarded correctly at the end floors?
The <<correction->> switches must be positioned so that the elevator does not travel beyond the floor level positions at the end floors. However, the <<correction->> switches should not be positioned too far, as this would make it impossible to fine-adjust the travel at the end floors.
Are the <<pre-limit->> switches at short floor distances in the end floors set so that the elevator is retarded correctly at the end floors?
The <<pre-limit->> switches should be positioned so that the elevator does not travel beyond the floor level positions at the end floors.
Are the incremental-encoder channels A and B connected correctly with the central unit?
If channels A and B are exchanged, the learning travel is aborted and the messages "No count signal" or "Counter over run" are output. The shield of the incremental-encoder line must be connected with the PE line on one side (shielding against interference).
Does the DSC (digital selector) board function properly?
If the error message "Card fault DSC modul", "DSC initialization" or " DSC connection" is present in the event register after the MPK control has been switched on, it was not possible to establish a connection with the DSC card. In this case, check whether the DSC card is fitted properly on the central unit. If the fault still occurs after that, observe the service LED on the DSC card (s. chapter <<appendix / descprition of the DSC LED´s>>). It should light up briefly during switch-on. If it stays lit continuously or does not function at all, the DSC card needs to be replaced.
If a safety circuit is present, does it function correctly?
If a safety circuit is not present, is the corresponding input on the central unit (terminal 37) connected firmly with terminal 200 (+24v)?
Has the correct transport height (total travel) been set in the menu?
A test value was set in the menu at the factory; this value need not be identical to the actual transport height of the elevator. Readjust the value as required.
IV / 14 06-04-28
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
Have you set the correct learning travel speed?
The learning travel should be performed at vSlow, provided that the drive is designed for this. Note that not every multi-speed drive is designed for a slow learning travel and that such drives are in danger of overheating at this speed.
Errors occurring during a learning travel are stored in the event register. A description of the errors can be found in the documentation titled "MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 introduction".
2.13.2 Checklist for correcting floor level values
Observe the following points before correcting floor level values:
Note that the releveling is switched to the inactive state for measurements to correct the floor level values.
Are the upward and downward cut-off values of v... (fast) and v... (intermediate) for each floor so that the
elevator has a constant vSlow in the zone?
For proper automatic <<correction->> of the cut-off values of vSlow, the elevator must have a constant vSlow in the zone of the destination floor. If this is not the case, you must increase the cut-off value for v... (fast) and v... (intermediate)
Are the upward and downward cut-off values of vSlow set for each floor so that they lie within the respective zone?
For proper operation of the DSC and proper <<correction->> of the cut-off values of vSlow, these values must lie within the respective zone. If this is not the case, you must decrease the cut-off value for vSlow or increase the length of the zone.
Note that a new learning travel must be performed after the zone length has been changed.
Does the elevator fail to stop floor level with one or more levels even after <<correction->> of the floor level and cut-off values for vSlow?
Have you entered the floor level <<correction->> values with the right sign?
• If the elevator floors too high, the value must be positive.
• If the elevator floors too low, the value must be negative.
Again check the conditions in the first two questions of this chapter. If these conditions have not been met, perform the stated instructions.
Then repeat the procedure for correcting the floor level values. Record the non-floor level values on every floor.
06-04-28 IV / 15
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
2.13.3 Checklist for releveling settings Are the values for releveling specified?
The values " releveling downward on" and " releveling upward on" determine the deviation point from the floor level position at which the elevator commences releveling. The values " releveling downward off" and " releveling upward off" determine the releveling cut-off point with respect to the floor level position.
Note that the stopping accuracy at the specified switch-on and cut-off positions of the releveling depends on the tolerances of the drive. For this reason, you should locate the cut-off positions close to the turn-on positions when performing initial settings. Correct the cut-off position after every releveling process until the ideal value is attained.
Is the releveling function active?
Activate releveling via the menu (see chap. 2.12).
The questions in the checklists merely supplement and do not substitute the "Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)"
3 Diagnostic 3.1 Function <<Stop position>>
Information Information
DSK- Diagnostics Stop position
Stop position Fl. 1 5.5 mm
Actual 7.0 mm
The menue function gives out the actual value of the stop position and the value of the stop position after the learning travel. Refering to the example stops the cabin in the 1. floor 1,5 mm to high.
3.2 Function <<Resolution>>
Information
DSK-Diagnostics
Resolution
0,981 mm / Impuls
The menue function gives out the resolution of the encoder system. It is the value of the last learning travel.
IV / 16 06-04-28
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
3.3 Function <<Valid learn. travel>>, <<Act. learning travel>>
Information Information
DSK-Diagnostics DSK-Diagnostics
Valid learn. travel Act. learning travel
* *
The functions save the values of the last valid learning travel and the current learning travel. It is a easy way to compare the fundamental values.
The menue functions give out:
• date und time of the last learning travel
• type of the learning travel (automatic learning travel)
• travel height
• number of the floors
• number of the lowest floor
• result of the learning travel
• number of the floor level positions
• number of the zones
4 Level offset supervise 4.1 Function <<level offset tolerance>>
Settings
Digital selector
Lev. offset tolerance
This function defines a tolerance range around the floor level position. If the car stops outside of this range, it records the level offset and provides it for a statistical evaluation.
4.2 Function <<level offset limit>>
Settings
Digital selector
Lev. offset limit
This function defines a tolerance range around the floor level position. If the car stops outside of this range, it starts the action set in the <<lev. offset handling>> function. It also records the level offset and provides it for a statistical evaluation.
4.3 Function <<level offset handling>>
Settings
Digital selector
Lev. offset handling
This function sets the fault reaction to stopping outside of the tolerance range of the <<lev. offset limit>> function.
06-04-28 IV / 17
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
5 Appendix 5.1 Position graph
Retardation V-fast
Zone range
V-fast V-intermediate
Retard. V-intermed.
Retardation V-fast
Zone range
Retard. V-intermed.
floor level
V-fast off down (initial value)
V-intermediate off down (initial value)
V-slow downward off (initial value)
V-intermediate off up (initial value)
V-fast off up (initial value)
V-slow upward off (initial value)
V-fast off down (level value)
V-intermediate off down (level value)
V-slow downward off (level value)
V-slow upward off (level value)
V-fast off up (level value)
V-intermediate off up (level value)
V-fast V-intermediate
IV / 18 06-04-28
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
5.2 Configuration of the Digital Selector (DSC)
Travel high [cm]
Min. distances for starting v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 [mm]
Relevelling [mm] on off
downward upward
slowing values [mm] v0 v1 v2 v3 v4 v5
downward upward
Table for the correction of the floor level-values:
+ = Car stands too high [mm] ⎯ = Car stands too low [mm]
Deviation [mm] Deviation [mm] Deviation [mm]lev. down up lev. down up lev. down up 1 21 41 2 22 42 3 23 43 4 24 44 5 25 45 6 26 46 7 27 47 8 28 48 9 29 49 10 30 50 11 31 51 12 32 52 13 33 53 14 34 54 15 35 55 16 36 56 17 37 18 38 19 39 20 40
06-04-28 IV / 19
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
5.3 DSC connection types
1. DSC connection using a protective circuit
(Safety module SM 01 - 001)
DSC module
Safety moduleSM 01-001
Increm.encoder S71
S72
S71 S72
A1 37 368284 83
8 12 11
E2 E3
MPK 400 / 4000: BST
Ter. DSC control Ter. .... 82 DSC zone E2 safety circuit 83 incrementer channel A E3 safety circuit zone 84 incrementer channel B A1 Relevelling on/delay
2. DSC connection without a protective circuit
DSC module
Increm.encoder
S71S71
84 83 82 3637200
MPK 400 / 4000: BST
E2* E3
* bridge 200-E2 onlyMPK 4000!
Ter. DSC control Ter. .... 82 DSC zone E2 safety circuit 83 incrementer channel A E3 (Attention! Different setting MPK400/4000)* 84 incrementer channel B A1 Relevelling on/delay
* MPK400: E3 set with function: „Zone S71“; MPK4000: E3 set with function: „Zone safety circuit“
IV / 20 06-04-28
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
5.4 Overview of the DSC module
Service-LED
EPROM
5.5 Description of the DSC LED´s
• DSC pulses A and DSC pulses B: The LED´s display the pulses from the incremental encoder. One or both Led´s may be lit at a stand still, depending on the position of the encoder. While the lift is moving, the signals are switched so rapidly that the LED´s appear to be lit constantly. The individual signals can only be distinguished briefly when starting and stopping. The LED´s are integrated in the BST-print of the MPK 400 / 4000 control.
• DSC zone: The LED illuminates when the DSC zone (S71or S71 & S72) signal is supplied.
• DSC status: The LED indicates communication between the MDSC and the inverter for a direct entry (reference point output, BST-terminal 81).
• Service LED: By removing the front cover of the MPK the DSC board is marked MDSC… .
If the board is functioning correctly, the LED flashes briefly when the control is switched on. If the LED does not light up or remains constantly lit, a hardware error has occurred (e.g. no EPROM present, incorrectly fitted EPROM or defective board).
The service LED is located on the DSC module. The LED´s "DSC status" and "DSC zone" are integrated in the BST-front panel of the MPK 400 / 4000 control.
06-04-28 IV / 21
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)
5.6 Selecting the incremental encoder and speed governor
A resolution of approx. 1mm is sufficient for floor level positioning. Improving the resolution (less than 0.5mm) does not result in more precise floor level positioning. Incremental encoders with resolutions higher than 1.2mm are too imprecise for floor level positioning.
Speed supplied governor by BODE:
The incremental encoder is driven by a toothed belt with a transmission ratio of 1:4 (the axle of the incremental encoder turns four times faster than the axle of the speed governor).
Speed governor diameter
[mm]
Speed governor circumference
[mm]
Trans. ratio Encoder resolution
[pulses/rev.]
Resolution [mm]
Pulses per m
200 596.9 1:4 72 1.04 962 300 911.06 1:4 125 0.91 1099
Speed governor supplied by Jungblut:
The incremental encoder is mounted via a coupling to the shaft of the speed governor, resulting in a transmission ratio of 1:1, or mounted via a tooth belt with a transmission ratio of 1:4.
Speed governor diameter
[mm]
Speed governor circumference
[mm]
Trans. ratio Encoder resolution
[pulses/rev.]
Resolution [mm]
Pulses per m
200 596.9 1:1 500 0.6 1667 300 911.06 1:1 500 0.91 1099 200 596,9 1:4 72 1,04 962 300 911,06 1:4 125 0,91 1099
5.7 Notes on signal routing
A line length of 100m does not impair the signal quality for frequently used speeds, like 1m/s, 1.6m/s, 2.5m/s, 3m/s.
Any screened, 4-wire data cable can be used for connecting the incremental encoder with the DSC terminal. The screen must be connected to the PE terminal.
IV / 22 06-04-28
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH KOLLMORGEN (UK) Ltd.
Broichstraße 32 Unit 17, St. Asaph Business Park
51109 Köln St. Asaph, Denbighshire LL17OLJ
Telefon +49 (0) 221 89 85 0 United Kingdom
Telefax +49 (0) 221 89 85 30 Telephone 0044-1745-585558
http://www.kollmorgen.de Fax 0044-1745-585828
Email [email protected] Email [email protected]
© KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 05-06-27 / DO_ap4hk_GB.doc
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
Contents
1 Commissioning ................................................................................................................. 4 1.1 Preparatory work involved when using a control system with safety circuit .......................4 1.2 Entering the travel height ..........................................................................................................5 1.3 Selecting of the learning travel / learning operation ...............................................................5 1.4 Automatic learning travel ..........................................................................................................5
1.4.1 Checking the signal connections ...........................................................................................5 1.4.2 Setting the learning travel speed ...........................................................................................6 1.4.3 Starting the learning travel ....................................................................................................6
1.5 Manual learning operation using the zone switches...............................................................7 1.5.1 Checking the signal connections ...........................................................................................7 1.5.2 Procedure..............................................................................................................................7
1.6 Manual learning operation with more than one levelposition in a zone ................................8 1.6.1 Checking the signal connections ...........................................................................................8 1.6.2 Procedure..............................................................................................................................9
1.7 Manual learning operation without using zone switches .....................................................10 1.7.1 Procedure............................................................................................................................10
1.8 Finalising work when using a control system with safety circuit ........................................11 1.9 Setting the deceleration points for the various speeds........................................................11
1.9.1 Deceleration point for <<v-fast>> and <<v-intermediate>> .................................................12 1.9.2 Deceleration point for <<v-slow>>.......................................................................................14 1.9.3 Direct entry (reference point output)....................................................................................14
1.10 Selecting the starting speed ...................................................................................................14 1.11 Deceleration point for the inspection run..............................................................................16 1.12 Measuring the floor level difference.......................................................................................17 1.13 Enter the floor level difference values ...................................................................................18 1.14 Correction the floor level values ............................................................................................18 1.15 Setting the relevelling ranges .................................................................................................18 1.16 Activating the relevelling.........................................................................................................19 1.17 Setting area of level output .....................................................................................................19
2 Installing and replacing the absolute encoder ............................................................ 20 2.1 Function <<Encoder type>> ....................................................................................................20 2.2 Function <<Install encoder>>..................................................................................................20 2.3 Function <<Encoder adjustment>>.........................................................................................21
3 Diagnostic........................................................................................................................ 21 3.1 Function <<Stop position>> ....................................................................................................21 3.2 Function <<Resolution>> ........................................................................................................21 3.3 Function <<Encoder / input lead>>.........................................................................................22 3.4 Function <<Speed>> ................................................................................................................22 3.5 Function <<Accelaration and decelaration>> ........................................................................22
V / 2 05-06-27
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
3.6 Function <<Measured breaking distance>> .......................................................................... 22 3.7 Function <<Zone list>>............................................................................................................ 23 3.8 Function <<Valid learning travel>> / <<actual learning travel>> ......................................... 23
4 Level offset supervise .....................................................................................................24 4.1 Function <<level offset tolerance>>....................................................................................... 24 4.2 Function <<level offset limit>> ............................................................................................... 24 4.3 Function <<level offset handling>>........................................................................................ 24
5 Appendix...........................................................................................................................25 5.1 Position graph.......................................................................................................................... 25 5.2 Configuration of the Absolute Pos. System (APS) ............................................................... 26
05-06-27 V / 3
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
1 Commissioning
Please note that the APS already contains some data as a result of works tests (e.g. travel height used for simulation). These values are not default values for the APS and they must be adjusted to suit the conditions at the site in question.
Settings
Relevelling
Active
NO
Switch off the relevelling function for the entire duration of the commissioning procedure. This will prevent relevelling being undertaken while discrepancies in level are being recorded.
Before you begin to set the APS, check:
• the values for each of the basic settings (number of floor levels, type of drive, .... )
• that the drive values in the main MPK menu <<Settings>> and those on the control mechanism match as these are crucial in influencing the lift performance
• that the absolute encoder and the MPK are connected (see circuit diagrams)
1.1 Preparatory work involved when using a control system with safety circuit
Settings
Safety circuit
Supervise
NO
If trace information recorded during the learning travel or during learning operation is incomplete, monitoring of the safety circuit should be switched off. This will prevent the control system reacting to errors in the safety circuit.
During the learning travel or during manual learning operation, zone signal S72 must be available to the MPK for calculation of the second zone signal, S71 (see circuit diagrams). Carry out the following steps to do this:
1. Under <<Information / BST-res.input Term.>> (MPK 4000),<<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> (MPK 400) or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>> (MPK 400/4000) check whether the <<Zone switch S72>> function has already been allocated to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules. If the function has already been allocated to an input, continue with step 3, otherwise proceed from step 2.
2. Allocate the <<Zone switch S72>> function to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules (for the procedure see the document entitled <<MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction>>, chap. <<free programmable terminals (BST / NET)>>).
3. Connect the freely assignable input <<Zone switch S72>> to the zone signal S72.
V / 4 05-06-27
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
1.2 Entering the travel height
Settings
Absolute pos.-system
Travel height
cm
Enter the travel height (in cm!) as accurately as possible.
The travel height is the distance between the access zone at the lowest level and the access zone at the highest level.
1.3 Selecting of the learning travel / learning operation
With zoneswitch?
With correctionswitches(13A/13B)?
Yes
Yes
goto chap. 1.4
Are more than onelevelposition in a zone
area ?(only MPK400 from prg. ver. 1.19)
No
Yes
No
No
goto chap. 1.5 goto chap. 1.6 goto chap. 1.7
1.4 Automatic learning travel
Basis settings
Lift
Type of selector
APS/autom. learn. trav.
Check the setting under <<Basic settings / Lift / Type of selector>>. The function must show the value <<APS / autom. learn. travel>>. Where necessary change the value shown to <<APS / autom. learn. travel>>.
1.4.1 Checking the signal connections
1. Has the <<Zone switch S72>> function been allocated to a freely assignable input on the BST (see the <<Information / BST-res.input Term.>> (MPK 4000),<<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> (MPK 400) or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>> (MPK 400/4000) menu)?
2. Has zone switch S72 been installed and has it been connected to the freely assignable input <<Zone switch S72>>?
3. Have the <<correction->> switches S13A (top) and S13B (bottom) been installed and have they been connected to the freely assignable inputs <<correction top>> and <<correction bottom>>?
4. When nearing the docking points at the terminal levels: Have the <<pre-limit->>switches (top) S15A and/or (bottom) S15B been installed and have they been connected to the freely assignable inputs <<pre-limit->>switch top and/or <<pre-limit->>switch bottom?
05-06-27 V / 5
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
Check the position of the <<correction->> switches and, when “short floor distance” is indicated at the top/bottom flloors, check also the position of the <<pre-limit->> switches as these switches are used to switch off fast speed during the learning travel. Where <<correction->> and <<pre-limit->> switch signals have been reversed or are missing, check that the lift car moves beyond the terminal floors at the pre-set learning travel speed or at the <<v-slow>> speed!
1.4.2 Setting the learning travel speed
Settings
Absolute pos.-system
Learning trav. speed
Select the speed for the learning travel.
Please note that not every drive motor is designed to carry out a learning travel at slow speed.
1.4.3 Starting the learning travel
Settings
Absolute pos.-system
Learning activated
You can start the learning travel whatever the position of the lift car. To do so, confirm the menu item <<Learning activated>> and the subsequent safety request by pressing “OK”.
The control system then automatically performs the learning travel.
Learning travel sequence:
1. Lift moves to the lowest zone provided the lift car is not already located in the lowest zonal range.
2. Learning travel up, whereby the start of each zone is recorded by the relevant count reading.
3. Learning travel down, whereby the start of each zone is recorded by the relevant count reading.
While the learning travel records information, the control system stores the positions of the zones. Following the learning travel, the program sets the level positions at the centre of each zonal range.
Once all calculations and the data exchange between the MPK and the APS have been completed, the message <<Lift ready to travel>> will appear in the usual display.
If errors are made during the learning travel or in the subsequent calculations, the message <<Blocked due to APS>> will appear in the usual display. You can find the associated cause of the error documented in the event log.
You can abort the learning travel by switching on inspection mode. In addition, any errors occuring independently of the APS operation (e.g. locks are opened) will abort the learning travel. You must re-start the learning travel (via the menu) following each aborted learning travel.
V / 6 05-06-27
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
If valid learning travel results already exist the lift will remain ready for operation even after the learning travel has been aborted.
If, following a valid learning travel, you make any changes to the positions of the zones in the shaft, you must start a new learning travel. On the successful completion of learning travel, continue with:
section 1.8 in the case of a control system which uses a safety circuit, otherwise section 1.9
1.5 Manual learning operation using the zone switches
Basis settings
Lift
Type of selector
APS/man. learn. operat
Check the setting under <<Basic settings / Lift / Type of selector>>. The function must show the value <<APS / manu. learn. operat.>>. Where necessary change the value shown to <<APS / manu. learn. operat.>>.
1.5.1 Checking the signal connections
1. Has the <<Zone switch S72>> function been allocated to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules (see <<Information / BST-res.input Term.>> (MPK 4000),<<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> (MPK 400) or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>> (MPK 400/4000) menu)?
2. Has zone switch S72 been installed and has it been connected to the freely assignable input <<Zone switch S72>>?
1.5.2 Procedure
Carry out the following steps in turn:
1. Switch on electrical emergency operation or inspection mode.
2. Set the <<Settings / absolute Pos.-System / APS-Learn. operation>> function to <<YES>>. (Notice: look at )
3. If the lift car is not located in the lowest zonal range, move the car into the lowest zone using the electrical emergency operation or inspection module.
4. Using the electrical emergency operation or inspection module, move the car into the highest zone
5. Using the electrical emergency operation or inspection module, move the car into the lowest zone.
6. Set the <<Settings / absolute Pos.-System / APS-Learn. operation>> function to <<NO>>. (If learning operation has been switched on via the freely assignable input <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> +24v signal at the input. Notice: look at )
7. Switch off electrical emergency operation or inspection mode.
8. On the successful completion of learning operation, continue with:
• section 1.8 in the case of a control system which uses a safety circuit, otherwise section 1.9
05-06-27 V / 7
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
As an alternative to using the settings in the menu, you can also activate learning operation via a freely assignable input. To do this, carry out the following steps:
1. Under <<Information / BST-res.input Term.>> (MPK 4000),<<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> (MPK 400) or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>> (MPK 400/4000), check whether the <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> function has already been allocated to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules. If the function has already been allocated to an input, continue with step 3, otherwise proceed from step 2.
2. Allocate the <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> function to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules (for the procedure see the document entitled <<MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction>>, chap. <<free programmable terminals (BST / NET)>>.
3. Connect the freely assignable input <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> up to the +24v supply.
While the learning travel records information, the control system stores the positions of the zones. Following the learning travel, the program sets the level positions at the centre of each zonal range.
Once all calculations and the data exchange between the MPK and the APS have been completed, the message <<Lift ready to travel>> will appear in the usual display.
If errors are made during the learning travel or in the subsequent calculations, the message <<Blocked due to APS>> will appear in the usual display. You can find the associated cause of the error documented in the event recorder.
Please note that manual learning operation will delete all the data from a previously carried out and valid learning travel.
1.6 Manual learning operation with more than one levelposition in a zone
Basis settings
Lift
Type of selector
APS/man. learn. operat
Check the setting under <<Basic settings / Lift / Type of selector>>. The function must show the value <<APS / manu. learn. operat.>>. Where necessary change the value shown to <<APS / manu. learn. operat.>>.
1.6.1 Checking the signal connections
1. Has the <<Zone switch S72>> function been allocated to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules (see <<Information / BST-res.input Term.>> (MPK 4000),<<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> (MPK 400) or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>> (MPK 400/4000) menu)?
2. Has zone switch S72 been installed and has it been connected to the freely assignable input <<Zone switch S72>>?
V / 8 05-06-27
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
1.6.2 Procedure
Carry out the following steps in turn:
1. Switch on electrical emergency operation or inspection mode.
2. Set the <<Settings / absolute Pos.-System / APS-Learn. operation>> function to <<YES>>. (Notice: look at )
3. Under <<Information / BST-res.input Term.>> (MPK 4000),<<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> (MPK 400) or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>> (MPK 400/4000), check whether the <<APS - Learn. Op. Level>> function has already been allocated to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules. If the function has already been allocated to an input, continue with step 4, otherwise proceed from step 3.
4. Allocate the <<APS - Learn. Op. Level>> function to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules (see point 6; for the procedure see the document entitled <<MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction>>, chap. <<free programmable terminals (BST / NET)>>).
5. Move the lift car into the level range of the 1. floor.
6. At the push of a button, transmit a +24v signal at the <<APS - Learn. Op. Level>> input. The ON-/OFF-signal sets the level range. If you use the inspection control, you can set the level range with the up- and down-pushbuttons of the inspection control. You have to press both buttons at the same time for setting the level range. This function is available at MPK 400 from Liftprogram LIFT 4H 1.08.
7. Move the lift car into the level range of the next floor.
8. Carry out steps 6 and 7 for every floor in up-direction.
9. Move the lift car into the level range of the 1. floor.
10. Set the <<Settings / absolute Pos.-System / APS-Learn. operation>> function to <<NO>>. (If learning operation has been switched on via the freely assignable input <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> +24v signal at the input. Notice: look at )
11. Switch off electrical emergency operation or inspection mode.
12. On the successful completion of learning operation, continue with:
• section 1.8 in the case of a control system which uses a safety circuit, otherwise section 1.9
As an alternative to using the settings in the menu, you can also activate learning operation via a freely assignable input. To do this, carry out the following steps:
1. Under <<Information / BST-res.input Term.>> (MPK 4000),<<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> (MPK 400) or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>> (MPK 400/4000), check whether the <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> function has already been allocated to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules. If the function has already been allocated to an input, continue with step 3, otherwise proceed from step 2.
2. Allocate the <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> function to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules (for the procedure see the document entitled <<MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction>>, chap. <<free programmable terminals (BST / NET)>>.
3. Connect the freely assignable input <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> up to the +24v supply.
05-06-27 V / 9
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
Once all calculations and the data exchange between the MPK and the APS have been completed, the message <<Lift ready to travel>> will appear in the usual display.
If errors are made during the learning travel or in the subsequent calculations, the message <<Blocked due to APS>> will appear in the usual display. You can find the associated cause of the error documented in the event log.
Please note that manual learning operation will delete all the data from a previously carried out and valid learning travel.
1.7 Manual learning operation without using zone switches
Basis settings
Lift
Type of selector
APS/man. learn. operat
Check the setting under <<Basic settings / Lift / Type of selector>>. The function must show the value <<APS / manu. learn. operat.>>. Where necessary change the value shown to <<APS / manu. learn. operat.>>.
Inspect it, that the inputs <<zone S71>> and <<zone S72>> are not connected to a 24VDC-signal!
1.7.1 Procedure
Carry out the following steps in turn:
1. Set the <<Settings / absolute Pos.-System / APS-Learn. operation>> function to <<YES>>. (Notice: look at )
2. Under <<Information / BST-res.input Term.>> (MPK 4000),<<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> (MPK 400) or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>> (MPK 400/4000), check whether the <<APS - Learn. Op. Level>> function has already been allocated to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules. If the function has already been allocated to an input, continue with step 4, otherwise proceed from step 3.
3. Allocate the <<APS - Learn. Op. Level>> function to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules (see point 6; for the procedure see the document entitled <<MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction>>, chap. <<free programmable terminals (BST / NET)>>).
4. Switch on electrical emergency operation or inspection mode.
5. Move the lift car into the level range of the next floor.
6. At the push of a button, transmit a +24v signal at the <<APS - Learn. Op. Level>> input. The ON-/OFF-signal sets the level range. If you use the inspection control, you can set the level range with the up- and down-pushbuttons of the inspection control. You have to press both buttons at the same time for setting the level range. This function is available at MPK 400 from Liftprogram LIFT 4H 1.08.
7. Carry out steps 5 and 6 for every floor.
8. Switch off electrical emergency operation or inspection mode.
9. Set the <<Settings / absolute Pos.-System / APS-Learn. operation>> function to <<NO>>. (If learning operation has been switched on via the freely assignable input <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> +24v signal at the input. Notice: look at )
10. On the successful completion of learning operation, continue with: section 1.9
V / 10 05-06-27
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
As an alternative to using the settings in the menu, you can also activate learning operation via a freely assignable input. To do this, carry out the following steps:
1. Under <<Information / BST-res.input Term.>> (MPK 4000),<<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> (MPK 400) or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>> (MPK 400/4000), check whether the <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> function has already been allocated to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules. If the function has already been allocated to an input, continue with step 3, otherwise proceed from step 2.
2. Allocate the <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> function to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net- modules (for the procedure see the document entitled <<MPK 40 / 400 / 4000 Instruction>>, chap. <<free programmable terminals (BST / NET)>>.
3. Connect the freely assignable input <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> up to the +24v supply.
Once all calculations and the data exchange between the MPK and the APS have been completed, the message <<Lift ready to travel>> will appear in the usual display.
If errors are made during the learning travel or in the subsequent calculations, the message <<Blocked due to APS>> will appear in the usual display. You can find the associated cause of the error documented in the event log.
Please note that manual learning operation will delete all the data from a previously carried out and valid learning travel.
1.8 Finalising work when using a control system with safety circuit
Settings
Safety circuit
Supervise
YES
Switch on monitoring of the safety circuit.
Disconnect the freely assignable input <<Zone switch S72>> and the S72 zone signal. Continue as per section 1.9.
1.9 Setting the deceleration points for the various speeds
The value of each deceleration point corresponds with the braking distance for each speed.
05-06-27 V / 11
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
The MPK 400 / 4000 system supports up to five different travel speeds (v1 – v5). The following correlation exists for the speeds (v0, v1 - v5):
Number of travel speeds: 1 2 3 4 5
<<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) - <<v-intermed.>> (v1) <<v-intermed.>> (v1) <<v-intermed.>> (v1) <<v-intermed.>> (v1)
<<v-fast>> (v2) <<v-fast>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v2) <<v-fast>> (v3) <<v-intermed.>> (v3) <<v-intermed.>> (v3) <<v-fast>> (v4) <<v-intermed.>> (v4) <<v-fast>> (v5)
(<<v-slow>> = approach speed; <<v-intermed.>> = intermediate speed)
Fix the deceleration point by entering a basic value. The basic value for the associated speed and direction is the same for all floor levels.
You can also adjust the deceleration distances separately for each floor by using a floor value (see <<appendix / position graph>>).
The floor values for the speeds <<v-fast>> and <<v-intermediate>> are the same as the relevant basic value in terms of their value. They should not usually be changed further. Likewise, the floor value for <<v-slow>> is based on the associated basic value, but it is however re-calculated after any discrepancies in level have been entered via the <<Correct level>> function.
Please note that a change in the basic value will alter all the associated floor values!
At the start of the APS installation procedure, select longer deceleration distances to prevent the level positions being overshot. You can later change the deceleration distances at any time and make adjustments to achieve the desired lift performance.
The number of available speeds results from the settings in the <<Start spd v... from>> functions. Read the specifications given in section 1.10!
1.9.1 Deceleration point for <<v-fast>> and <<v-intermediate>>
Depending on the settings on the control mechanism, determine the braking distance from the diagram of the drive. Enter this value in the menu.
Settings Settings
Absolute pos.-system Absolute pos.-system
v... off up v... off down
Ensure that, looking in the direction of travel, the position of the <<correction->> or <<pre-limit->> switch* is behind that of the deceleration point set for the speed <<v-fast>>. If this is not the case, the correction or <<pre-limit->> switch will switch off fast speed.
* The <<correction->> or <<pre-limit->> switch are not necessary by APS, but you can install this switches additional to the settings of APS. An <<pre-limit->> switch is necessary if the terminal floors shows “short floor distance”.
V / 12 05-06-27
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
Example
You are now going to determine the deceleration value for <<v-fast>> (v2).
The specifications for the controlled drive are: <<v-fast>> = 1.0 m/s; deceleration = 0.8 m/s²
1.2 m/s21.0 m/s2
0.8 m/s2
0.6 m/s2
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
m/s
m
Brakingdistance
Speed v-fast
1.2
Diagram of the braking distance
Retardation
From the diagram this results in a braking distance of: min. 1.2 m
Braking distance = deceleration value for <<v-fast>> = 1.2 m = 1200 mm
Enter the calculated deceleration values in the menu:
Settings Settings
Absolute pos.-system Absolute pos.-system
v2 off up v2 off down
1200 mm 1200 mm
Remark: The diagram of the braking distance is valid only for the example!
05-06-27 V / 13
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
1.9.2 Deceleration point for <<v-slow>>
Settings Settings
Absolute pos.-system Absolute pos.-system
v0 off up v0 off down
Enter the distance required for the lift to come to a complete standstill once the v0 approach speed <<v-slow>> has been switched off.
1.9.3 Direct entry (reference point output)
Direct entry allows the lift to approach directly without constantly having to travel at the speed <<v-slow>> (no crawling distance).
The requirements for direct entry are:
1. a frequency-regulated drive
2. the regulator must be able to assess a reference point (check the manufacturer’s information).
Settings
Absolute pos.-system
output ref. point
The values <<at pos. v0>> and <<at pos. v-fast>> are available for the distance between the reference point and the level position. The setting <<NO>> will switch off the reference point output.
You must also enter the value of the <<v0>> or <<v-fast>> deceleration point (according to the setting on the MPK) in the menu of the regulator.
1.10 Selecting the starting speed
Depending on the distance to be covered to the destination level, you can specify the most suitable speed for the lift motion.
In doing this you are determining the distances required in order to be able to start the lift at fast speed or at intermediate speed. Use the required braking distances and the acceleration rates given for each speed for the distances.
By entering the distance to be covered, you are determining:
1. the speed issued for the next lift motion
2. the number of travel speeds available, e.g. if only distances to v3 are entered, then three travel speeds are available
V / 14 05-06-27
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
Distance (W) in Additional Speeds No. of the <<Start spd v... from>>* functions condition for the Available travel v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 values (W) on the MPK speeds
(W2) 0<(W2) v0,v2 1 (W1) (W2) 0<(W1)<(W2) v0,v1,v2 2 (W1) (W2) (W3) 0<(W1)<(W2)<(W3) v0,v1,v2,v3 3 (W1) (W2) (W3) (W4) 0<(W1)<(W2)<(W3)<(W4) v0,v1,v2,v3,v4 4 (W1) (W2) (W3) (W4) (W5) 0<(W1)<(W2)<(W3)<(W4)<(W5) v0,v1,v2,v3,v4,v5 5
(Legend: 0<(W1)<(W2)<(W3) = W1 “greater than” 0, W2 “greater than” W1, W3 “greater than” W2; =inactive)
Example:
The following has been stipulated:
Floor distances: 3.5 m and 1.6 m
Two travel speeds (v1,v2)
From 1.8.1 <<v-fast>> (v2): 1.0 m/s, braking distance = acceleration distance = 1.2 m,
assuming <<v-intermediate>> (v1): 0.5 m/s, braking distance = acceleration distance = 0.6 m
In order for the lift to be started at the speed <<v-fast>> (v2), you can determine the minimum distance from the following:
Acceleration distance: 1.2 m
+ Deceleration distance: 1.2 m
+ Distance at constant <<v-fast>> speed: 0.4 m (specified)
Minimum distance of 2.8 m (2800 mm)* *between two levels
In order for the lift to be started at the speed <<v-intermediate>> (v1), you can determine the minimum distance from the following:
Acceleration distance: 0.6 m
+ Deceleration distance: 0.6 m
+ Distance at constant <<v-intermediate>> speed: 0.2 m (specified)
Minimum distance of 1.4 m (1400 mm)* *between two levels
Note: Going by the results in the example, the lift should always start at the slow speed for a floor distance of less than 1.4 m.
05-06-27 V / 15
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
Enter the calculated minimum distances to be covered in the menu:
Settings Settings
Absolute pos.-system Absolute pos.-system
Start spd. v1 from Start spd. v2 from
1400 mm 2800 mm
Ensure that the <<Start spd v... from>> functions, i.e. the speeds not used, show the value <<inactive>>.
1.11 Deceleration point for the inspection run
If <<correction->> or <<pre-limit->> switches are not used, the deceleration point for the inspection speed must be specified in the menu.
Settings
Absolute pos.-system
vInsp. off at
Deceleration points can be selected for the speeds:
v0, v1, v2
When the control system indicates a special operational status such as:
• invalid test run
• APS not in operation
• control system blocked by APS
the inspection run will no longer contain a pre-set deceleration point. This means that the lift car will travel past the terminal level at the inspection speed.
If a deceleration point is necessary, set:
• an <<correction->> or <<pre-limit->> switch, if the distance to be covered is inadequate in terms of the <<correction->> switch
• a zone at terminal level for stopping the lift car
V / 16 05-06-27
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
1.12 Measuring the floor level difference
The APS is designed to make it as easy as possible to make adjustments to levelling accuracy without adjustments to the shaft magnets.
As described before the APS sets the floor level in the middle of the measured zone (S71 or S71 & S72) by default. It may then be necessary to change these base values to have correct stopping at each level. Drive to each floor in the upward and downward directions. Measure the floor level deviation and enter the values separately for each direction of travel in the table provided in the appendix of this manual.
The following chart illustrates the relationship between the actual floor level points and the stopping points for each direction.
ddown
dup
Stopping point duringdownward approach
deceleration point v downward slow
Stopping point duringupward approach
deceleration point v upwardslow
Actual flush position of the level
The distances between the actual floor level points and stopping points are defined as dDOWN and dUP for both directions. If the lift stops below the actual floor level point, the measured value is a minus sign. If the lift stops above the actual floor level point, the measured value is a plus sign.
Example of correcting the floor level values:
• Lift with 4 floors
The following values of floor level difference have been measured:
Floor Downward approach: ddown Upward approach: dup
1 -5 mm (too low) - 2 +12 mm (too high) +2 mm (too high) 3 -10 mm (too low) -20 mm (too low) 4 - +8 mm (too high)
05-06-27 V / 17
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
1.13 Enter the floor level difference values
Enter the floor level difference values for every level.
the floor level difference values form example chap. 1.12:
Settings Settings Settings
Absolute pos.-system Absolute pos.-system Absolute pos.-system
Fl.level difference Fl.level difference Fl.level difference
Fl. 1 down -5 mm Fl. 2 up 2 mm Fl. 2 down 12 mm
After completing the entries: Check all these values again to ensure that the correction is performed without any errors.
Mind the sign of your measured floor level differences.
1.14 Correction the floor level values
Settings
Absolute pos.-system
Fl. level-correction
Press OK, the display then shows <<are you sure?>>, press OK and then the system will recalculate the floor levels.
1.15 Setting the relevelling ranges
The relevelling function consists of mainly four settings, these are shown below. When the lift moves away from the floor level due to loads moving in and out of the lift car the lift may require to relevel back to floor level.
Enter the relevelling ranges for each direction. The set values apply to all levels (see diagram below).
The following chart shows the relevelling positions.
Releveling downon: 20 mm
Releveling downoff: 10 mm
Releveling upoff: 10 mm
Releveling upon: 20 mmZone range
Zone range
Floorlevel
V / 18 05-06-27
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
Example of setting the activation and deactivation values for relevelling:
Relevelling is to be activated in the upward and downward directions 20 mm from the floor level point and deactivated 10 mm from the floor level point.
Settings Settings
Relevelling Relevelling
Relevelling up on Relevelling up on
vs. fl. lev. 20 mm vs. fl. lev. 10 mm
Settings Settings
Relevelling Relevelling
Relevelling down on Relevelling down on
vs. fl. lev. 20 mm vs. fl. lev. 10 mm
Please note that the stopping accuracy in relation to the cutting in and/or deceleration positions for the relevelling facility are dependent on the tolerances of the drive. For this reason, you should set the deceleration positions close to the cutting in positions at the start of calibration. After each relevelling procedure, adjust the deceleration position until the optimum value is reached.
1.16 Activating the relevelling
Settings
Relevelling
Active
YES
Set the following menu item to <<YES>>.
1.17 Setting area of level output
Settings
Absolute Pos. System
area of level output
± ... mm
This function sets the length of floor level range from 50 to a maximum of 250 mm and is used for triggering the <<level output>> and the <<level>> LED on the front plate.
05-06-27 V / 19
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
2 Installing and replacing the absolute encoder The following values must be input into the control system for the initial commissioning of the absolute encoder or after replacing it:
• the resolution of the absolute encoder (see 2.1)
The following must also be taken into account:
• has the installed absolute encoder been replaced by a new, structurally identical absolute encoder? (see 2.2)
• has the installed absolute encoder been maladjusted, e.g. have the belts on the pick-up system been changed? (see 2.3)
2.1 Function <<Encoder type>>
Settings
Absolute Pos.-system
Encoder type
Check the setting and adjust the resolution if necessary.
2.2 Function <<Install encoder>>
After replacing structurally identical absolute encoder, the count of the new absolute encoder will differ from value stored in the MPK. The functions <<Install encoder>> and <<Encoder adjustment>> can be used to match the counts.
Procedure:
1. Install and connect up the new absolute encoder
2. Move the lift car to the lowest level with the aid of the inspection mode or electrical emergency operation
3. Select the <<Install encoder>> function in the menu and confirm by pressing OK
Settings
Absolute Pos.-system
Install encoder
The count on the absolute encoder now matches the old count, although there may be a very slight deviation. The <<Encoder adjustment>> function is used to level out the remaining deviation (see 2.3).
V / 20 05-06-27
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
2.3 Function <<Encoder adjustment>>
Settings
Absolute Pos.-system
Encoder adjustment
Slight deviations in the counts which occur following work on the measuring system will mean that the lift will stop out-of-line on all levels. The amount by which the lift will be out-of-line will be the same for all levels and for both directions of travel.
Procedure:
1. Call the lift to any floor
2. Measure the discrepancy in level at this floor and make a note of it with the correct prefix*
3. Select the <<Encoder adjustment>> function in the menu
4. Enter the discrepancy in level with the correct prefix
5. Confirm your entry by pressing OK (the value will now be accepted)
6. Check the level at any floor
* a negative prefix is used when the lift car stops just below the level position, a positive one when the lift car stops above the level position
Please note that the functions <<Install encoder>> and <<Encoder adjustment>> may only be performed when structurally identical absolute encoder are replaced. If the absolute encoder types are not structurally identical, a new learning travel must be carried out.
3 Diagnostic 3.1 Function <<Stop position>>
Information Information
APS-Diagnostics Stop position
Stop position Fl. 1 5.5 mm
Actual 7.0 mm
The menue function gives out the actual value of the stop position and the value of the stop position after the learning travel. Refering to the example stops the cabin in the 1. floor 1,5 mm to high.
3.2 Function <<Resolution>>
Information
APS-Diagnostics
resolution
The menue function gives out the resolution of the encoder system after the last learning travel.
05-06-27 V / 21
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
3.3 Function <<Encoder / input lead>>
Information Information
APS-Diagnostics APS-Diagnostics
encoder / input lead encoder / input lead
Value valid Value invalid
The menue function gives out the actual status of the measuring system. The reasons of invalid values can be: defect encoder, defect input lead or interchanged connections of the encoder.
3.4 Function <<Speed>>
Information
APS-Diagnostics
Speed [m/s]
v: 1.23 vmax: 1.89
The menue function gives out for the actual travel: - direction - speed - max.value of speed
When the cabin stopped the value of vmax is the topspeed of the last travel.
3.5 Function <<Accelaration and decelaration>>
Information Information
APS-Diagnostics APS-Diagnostics
Accelaration [m/s^2] Decelaration [m/s^2]
a: + 0.10 amax: +0.60 a: - 0.15 amax: -0.82
The menue function gives out for the actual travel: - accelaration (plus sign) - decelaration (minus sign) - Topvalues
When the cabin stopped the value of amax is the top accelaration / decelaration of the last travel.
3.6 Function <<Measured breaking distance>>
Information
APS-Diagnostics
measured break.dist
7655 mm ± 24 mm
The menue function gives out the braking distance and the measure tolerance of the braking distance.
Refering to the example the braking distance is between 7631 mm and 7679 mm.
V / 22 05-06-27
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
3.7 Function <<Zone list>>
The menue function gives out all zone positions in form of a list. The differences of the ON- and OFF-values are the hysteresis of the magnetic switches.
InformationAPS-Diagnosticszone list upw.Z[01] OFF 250.46 mm
InformationAPS-Diagnosticszone list downw.Z[01] ON 230.32 mm
InformationAPS-Diagnosticszone listZ[01] TOP 20.14 mm
InformationAPS-Diagnosticszone list OK
Zone [01]
3.8 Function <<Valid learning travel>> / <<actual learning travel>>
Information Information
APS-Diagnostics APS-Diagnostics
Valid learn. travel Actual learn. travel
The functions save the values of the last valid learning travel and the actual learning travel. It is a easy way to compare the fundamental values.
The menue functions give out:
• date und time of the last learning travel
• type of the learning travel (automatic learning travel or manual learning operation)
• travel height
• number of the floors
• number of the lowest floor
• result of the learning travel
• number of the floor level positions
• number of the zones
05-06-27 V / 23
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
4 Level offset supervise 4.1 Function <<level offset tolerance>>
Settings
Absolute Pos.-system
Lev. offset tolerance
This function defines a tolerance range around the floor level position. If the car stops outside of this range, it records the level offset and provides it for a statistical evaluation.
4.2 Function <<level offset limit>>
Settings
Absolute Pos.-system
Lev. offset limit
This function defines a tolerance range around the floor level position. If the car stops outside of this range, it starts the action set in the <<lev. offset handling>> function. It also records the level offset and provides it for a statistical evaluation.
4.3 Function <<level offset handling>>
Settings
Absolute Pos.-system
Lev. offset handling
This function sets the fault reaction to stopping outside of the tolerance range of the <<lev. offset limit>> function.
V / 24 05-06-27
MPK 400 / 4000
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
5 Appendix 5.1 Position graph
Retardation V-fast
Zone range
V-fast V-intermediate
Retard. V-intermed.
Retardation V-fast
Zone range
Retard. V-intermed.
floor level
V-fast off down (initial value)
V-intermediate off down (initial value)
V-slow downward off (initial value)
V-intermediate off up (initial value)
V-fast off up (initial value)
V-slow upward off (initial value)
V-fast off down (level value)
V-intermediate off down (level value)
V-slow downward off (level value)
V-slow upward off (level value)
V-fast off up (level value)
V-intermediate off up (level value)
V-fast V-intermediate
05-06-27 V / 25
MPK 400 / 4000 Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
5.2 Configuration of the Absolute Pos. System (APS)
Travel high [cm] (total travel)
v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5
Min. dist. for starting [mm]
on off Relevelling down [mm] Relevelling up [mm]
v 0 v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 v 5
Deceleration points down Deceleration points up [mm]
Table for the correction of the floor level - values:
+ = Car stands too high [mm] ⎯ = Car stands too low [mm]
Lev. Downw. [mm] Upw. [mm] Lev. Downw. [mm] Upw. [mm] Lev. Downw. [mm] Upw. [mm]
1 21 41 2 22 42 3 23 43 4 24 44 5 25 45 6 26 46 7 27 47 8 28 48 9 29 49 10 30 50 11 31 51 12 32 52 13 33 53 14 34 54 15 35 55 16 36 56 17 37 18 38 19 39 20 40
V / 26 05-06-27